Turning Programming Manual

CNC-Simulator Turning
with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle
Programmer's Guide
Version 6.07
Mathematisch Technische Software - Entwicklung GmbH Kaiserin-Augusta-Allee 101 D 10553 Berlin ( +49 / 30 / 34 99 600
Programmer's Guide CNC Simulator for Turning Version6.7 MTS Mathematisch Technische Software-Entwicklung GmbH Kaiserin-Augusta-Allee 101 D-10553 Berlin ( + 49 / 30 / 34 99 600 Fax +49 / 30 / 34 99 60 25 eMail: mts@mts-cnc.com WWW: http://www:mts-cnc.com Berlin, May 1995ofp, June 1998 akss, ofp, July 1998 BM; All rights reserved, including photomechanical reproduction and storage on electronic media.
DIN (Deutsche Industrie Norm), is the German Standard Specification as defined by the "Deutsches Institut fr Normung e. V." MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation PAL is short for "Prfungs- Aufgaben und Lehrmittelentwicklungsstelle" (Institute for the Development of Examination Standards and Training Aids), a division of the "IHK Mittlerer Neckar" (Chamber of Industry and Commerce of the Middle-Neckar Region)
Contents
Table of Contents
0 Introduction.....................................................................................................................9
0.1 CNC Simulator Turning with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle ...........................................................10 0.2 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x ......................................................................................11
1 Basic Geometry ............................................................................................................13

1.1 The Coordinate System .........................................................................................................................13 1.2 Reference Points ...................................................................................................................................15 1.3 Absolute Dimensioning, Incremental Dimensioning ..............................................................................17 1.4 Tool Geometry.......................................................................................................................................19 1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage .......................................................................................................21 1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation TNC .....................................................................................................23
2 Introduction into NC Programming.............................................................................25

2.1 Structure of an NC Block (Format) ........................................................................................................25 2.2 Modal Commands and Non-modal Commands ....................................................................................26 2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses.......................................................................................27
3 Miscellaneous Functions (M-Functions) .................................................................... 28

3.1 Activate/Deactivate Spindle ...................................................................................................................28 3.2 Coolant ..................................................................................................................................................28 3.3 Programmed Halt ..................................................................................................................................28 3.4 Program End .........................................................................................................................................29 3.5 Lock / Unlock Centre Sleeve .................................................................................................................29 3.6 Feedrate ................................................................................................................................................29 3.7 Spindle Speed .......................................................................................................................................29 3.8 Tool Change ..........................................................................................................................................30
4 Programming Commands in Compliance with DIN 66025 ........................................31

4.1 Rapid Traverse G00 ..............................................................................................................................33 4.2 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01.......................................................................................35 4.3 Clockwise Circular Interpolation G02 ....................................................................................................36 4.4 Circular Interpolation Counter-Clockwise G03 ......................................................................................37 4.5 Dwell G04 ..............................................................................................................................................38 4.6 polygonal machining G08 ......................................................................................................................38 4.7 In-Position Programming (Deceleration) G09 .......................................................................................39 4.8 Inch Data Input G20 ..............................................................................................................................40 4.9 Metric Data Input (mm) G21..................................................................................................................41
MTS GmbH 1998
Contents 4.10 Invocation of a Subprogram G22........................................................................................................ 43 4.11 Repeated Program Parts G23 ............................................................................................................ 44 4.12 Unconditional Jump G24..................................................................................................................... 45 4.13 Move to the Reference Point G25....................................................................................................... 46 4.14 Move to the Tool-Changing Position G26 ........................................................................................... 47 4.15 Positioning the Tailstock G28 ............................................................................................................. 48 4.16 Thread Cutting G33 (Chasing Cycle).................................................................................................. 50 4.17 Tool Nose Compensation G41 / G42.................................................................................................. 52 4.18 Cancel Tool Nose Compensation G40 ............................................................................................... 52 4.19 In Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position G48....................................................................... 53 4.20 Description of a Final Contour G51..................................................................................................... 55 4.21 Define Workpiece Zero - Absolute: G54 - G56 and G58.................................................................... 57 4.22 Incremental Zero Shift G59................................................................................................................. 59 4.23 Cancel Incremental Zero Shift G53 .................................................................................................... 60 4.24 Activate Absolute Dimensions G90..................................................................................................... 61 4.25 Activate Incremental Dimensions G91................................................................................................ 62 4.26 Spindle Speed Limitation G92 ............................................................................................................ 63 4.27 Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute) G94 ............................................................................................... 64 4.28 Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution) G95......................................................................................... 65 4.29 Constant Cutting Speed G96 .............................................................................................................. 66 4.30 Cancel Constant Cutting Speed G97.................................................................................................. 66
5 Cycles ............................................................................................................................67
5.1 Complete Table of Available Cycles ..................................................................................................... 67 5.2 Threading Cycle G31 ............................................................................................................................ 69 5.3 Travel Range Limitation G36 for Multipass Cycles ............................................................................... 72 5.4 Finishing Allowance G57 ...................................................................................................................... 73 5.5 Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G75 ........................................................................... 77 5.6 Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G76 .............................................................................. 79 5.7 Clearance Cutting Cycle: G78 .............................................................................................................. 81 5.8 Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 76................................................................................ 85 5.9 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides G79 ................................................... 87 5.10 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour G81 .................................................................................... 88 5.11 Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour G82..................................................................................... 98 5.12 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80 .................................................................................. 107 5.13 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle G83............................................................................................. 111 5.14 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles G36 ........................................................................... 113 5.15 Deep Drilling Cycle G84.................................................................................................................... 115 5.16 Clearance Cutting Cycle G85 ........................................................................................................... 117 5.17 Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76 ................................................................................... 121 5.18 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses G86................................................................................ 123
Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07
Contents 5.19 Recessing Cycle for any Contour G87 ..............................................................................................124 5.20 Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88...............................................................................................................131 5.21 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) G89 ......................................................................135
6 Segment Contour Programming ...............................................................................142

6.1 G-Functions for Contour String Programming.....................................................................................142 6.2 Additional Addresses ...........................................................................................................................146 6.2.1 Circle Centres Absolute...............................................................................................................147 6.2.2 Tangential Transitions .................................................................................................................148 6.2.3 Selection of Solutions ..................................................................................................................151 6.3 Rounding between Two Entities ..........................................................................................................157 6.3.1 Chamfer between Two Lines.......................................................................................................159 6.4 Two-Point String: Straight Line G71 ....................................................................................................160 6.5 Two-Point String: Arc G72/G73 ..........................................................................................................162 6.6 Three-Point String: Line - Line G71G71 .............................................................................................166 6.7 Three-Point String: Arc - Line G72G71 or G73G71 ............................................................................170 6.8 Three-Point String: Line - Arc G71G72 or G71G73 ...........................................................................176 6.9 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc G72G72 or G72G73 or G73G72 or G73G73 ........................................183 6.10 Four-Point String:with Tangential Transitions....................................................................................188 6.11 Open Contour Strings........................................................................................................................194 6.12 Tangential Connection.......................................................................................................................201
7 Parameters ..................................................................................................................205 8 Programming with Special Characters..................................................................... 207

8.1 Comments ...........................................................................................................................................207 8.2 Skipping of NC blocks .........................................................................................................................207 8.3 Temporary Free Format ......................................................................................................................209 8.4 Arithmetic Operations ..........................................................................................................................209 8.5 Example of Programming with Parameters and Arithmetic Operations ..............................................213
9 Setup Form..................................................................................................................215
9.1 Preface ................................................................................................................................................215 9.2 Syntax of the Setup Form....................................................................................................................217 9.3 Setup Data: Beginning/End Indicator...................................................................................................218 9.4 Setup Data: Configuration Files...........................................................................................................218 9.5 Setup Data: Blank................................................................................................................................219 9.6 Setup Data: Prefabricated Part............................................................................................................221 9.7 Setup Data: Clamping Devices............................................................................................................222 9.8 Setup Data: Clamping Mode ...............................................................................................................223 9.9 Setup Data: Tailstock/Sleeve ..............................................................................................................224 9.10 Setup Data: Chucking Depth .............................................................................................................224
MTS GmbH 1998
Contents 9.11 Setup Data: Counter Spindle ............................................................................................................ 225 9.12 Setup Data: Current Tool .................................................................................................................. 226 9.13 Setup Data: Tools in the Turret......................................................................................................... 226 9.14 Setup Data: Driven Tools.................................................................................................................. 227 9.15 Setup Data: Compensation Values................................................................................................... 230
10 NC Program Analysis ...............................................................................................231 11 3D-View .....................................................................................................................233 12 CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle .................................................................. 235
12.1 Preface.............................................................................................................................................. 235 12.2 Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 237 12.3 Programming the Counter Spindle ................................................................................................... 238 12.3.1 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle G29 ........................................................................... 238 12.3.2 Work Part Transfer G30 ........................................................................................................... 239 12.3.3 Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point (when Programming Travel Movements) G59 ................................................................................................................................. 240 12.3.4 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid Speed Movement G00.............................. 241 12.3.5 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F in mm/min G01.................................. 242 12.3.6 Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point G27................................................. 243 12.3.7 Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle G28............................................................... 244 12.3.8 Bar feed for work parts in the main spindle G05 ...................................................................... 246
13 CNC Turning with Driven Tools...............................................................................247

13.1 Preface.............................................................................................................................................. 247 13.2 Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 251 13.3 Turning Plane G14............................................................................................................................ 252 13.4 Standard Plane G15 ......................................................................................................................... 253 13.5 Free-definable Plane G16................................................................................................................. 254 13.6 Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16 .......................................................... 259 13.7 Machining Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 .......................................................................... 262 13.7.1 Face Milling Cycle G60 ............................................................................................................. 262 13.7.2 Drilling Cycle G61 ..................................................................................................................... 264 13.7.3 Thread Tapping G62................................................................................................................. 265 13.7.4 Reaming/Boring G63 ................................................................................................................ 266 13.7.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64...................................................................................................... 267 13.7.6 Circular Pocket G65.................................................................................................................. 268 13.7.7 Tapping G66 ............................................................................................................................. 269 13.8 Multiple Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 .............................................................................. 270 13.8.1 Cycle on a Circle G67 ............................................................................................................... 270 13.8.2 Cycle on a Radius G68 ............................................................................................................. 271 13.8.3 Cycle at a Point G69 ................................................................................................................. 272 13.9 Front Face G17................................................................................................................................. 273 13.9.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates G10.................................................................. 274 13.9.2 Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates G11.......................................................................... 275 13.9.3 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise G12 ......................................................... 276 13.9.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13 ............................................. 277 13.10 Machining Cycles in the Front Face G17 ........................................................................................ 278
Contents 13.10.1 Drilling Cycle G61 ....................................................................................................................278 13.10.2 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................279 13.10.3 Reaming/Boring G63 ...............................................................................................................280 13.10.4 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................281 13.10.5 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................282 13.10.6 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................283 13.11 Multiple Cycles in the Front Face G17.............................................................................................284 13.11.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................284 13.11.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................285 13.11.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................286 13.12 Shell Surface - G18 .........................................................................................................................287 13.12.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates G10 ............................................................289 13.12.2 Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates G11....................................................290 13.12.3 Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise G12 ...................................................291 13.12.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13 ............................................292 13.13 Machining Cycles in the Shell Surface G18.....................................................................................293 13.13.1 Drilling cycle G61.....................................................................................................................293 13.13.2 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................294 13.13.3 Reaming/Boring G63 ...............................................................................................................295 13.13.4 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................296 13.13.5 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................297 13.13.6 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................298 13.14 Multiple Cycles in the Shell Surface G18.........................................................................................299 13.14.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................299 13.14.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................300 13.14.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................301 13.15 Chord Surface G19..........................................................................................................................302 13.16 Machining Cycles in the Chord Surface G19...................................................................................304 13.16.1 Plane Milling Cycle G60...........................................................................................................304 13.16.2 Drilling Cycle G61 ....................................................................................................................306 13.16.3 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................307 13.16.4 Reaming/Boring G63 ...............................................................................................................308 13.16.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................309 13.16.6 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................310 13.16.7 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................311 13.17 Multiple Cycles in the Chord Face ...................................................................................................312 13.17.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................312 13.17.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................313 13.17.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................314
Appendix : Table of Programmable Addresses ..........................................................315 Index ...........................................................................................................................................................318
MTS GmbH 1998
Introduction
0 Introduction
Dear user of the MTS CNC Simulator Turning 6, To make CNC Software for training and production means for us to follow carefully the development of CNC machines and controls all the time. With the target to give you an up-to-date product for the CNC programming of machining processes with five controllable NC axes, driven tools and counter spindle the MTS CNC Simulator is being constantly further developed and updated. These further developments are released as a new software version with corresponding modifications of operating and programming manuals. MTS Mathematisch Technische Software-Entwicklung GmbH
Regarding this edition This Programmer's Guide explains all available NC commands of the MTS Programming Code. In addition to the DIN 66025 commands, the programming of machining cycles and segment contour programming are explained. The MTS Programming Code is non-proprietary, i.e. not any specific to any one manufacturer's CNC control system. The Programmer's Guide is structured as follows: This Programmer's Guide explains all available NC commands of the MTS Programming Code. In addition to the DIN 66025 commands, the programming of machining cycles, segment contour programming, the programming of the counter spindle and driven tools are explained. The MTS Programming Code is non-proprietary, i.e. not any specific to any one manufacturer's CNC control system. The Programmer's Guide is structured as follows: Part One presents and explains the basic techniques of NC programming. Part Two, which is far more extensive, explains all commands which are part of the MTS programming code. For reasons of clarity these have been arranged in three main sections: DIN Commands Machining Cycles Segment Contour Programming (Contour Strings) Counter Spindle Driven Tools
This structure is intended to provide an easy introduction to NC programming even for the unskilled user. The expert programmer may use the clearly structured listing of commands as a quick-reference manual when confronted with complicated tasks. The general idea of the Programmer's Guide is to provide the user with explanations and support as he becomes familiar with manual programming. All mandatory and optional parameters are explained using NC Blocks and graphically represented.
MTS GmbH 1998
Introduction
0.1 CNC Simulator Turning with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle
Complete Machining The re-developed version 6 of the CNC system turning expands the performance of the MTS CNC Simulator. In addition to improved programming of rotation symmetrical machining it is possible to create and simulate easily NC programs for complete machining with driven tools and a counter spindle. Both of the new modules are optionally available to the new basic version of CNC Turning 6. For the realization of complex machining tasks 5 controllable NC axes and driven tools are available. It is possible to position the C axis exactly and to interpolate it, for instance, to generate geometries by overlaying tool movements. The turret can additionally be moved in the Y axis and rotated in the B axis. To support rear side machining a special free-configurable counter spindle has been realized on a track of its own for the work part take-over. Counter spindle and turret can be configured alternatively. For machining on counter spindle a complete programming code including the application of driven tools is available. The dynamic simulation of machining with driven tools is carried out in the CNC Simulator Turning in multiple windows technique enabling both 2D as well as 3D representations of the machining process. Hereby the contour of the work part being machined is being constantly updated.
5 Controllable NC Axis: X, Z, C, Y, B Counter Spindle
2D- and 3D-Representation in Multiple Windows Technique Screen Layout in CNC Simulator 6 Turning during Machining with Driven Tools
When machining with driven tools the following four windows are represented on the screen: 1 3 2 4 1 Longitudinal section as a full section on X, Z plane based on the current C axis (so-called C cut). The view can be shifted and zoomed as desired. The window 2 is always represented in the same scale as the window 1. 2 Section cut as a full section on X, Y plane. The Z coordinate of the section can be selected in window 1. 3 Free-definable view of a work part or of the whole work space of the CNC turning machine corresponding to window 1. 4 3D machining view. Distance and viewing angle in relation to the work space can be changed as desired.
10
Introduction
3D-Collision Monitoring
During machining processes with driven tools collision monitoring is carried out in 3D window. It considers the clamping device, the non-cutting parts of the tool (shaft, take-over, turret) as well as the cutting part of the tool during rapid speed movement of the tool. The CNC Simulator Turning 6 offers as an effective function the possibility to acquire production-relevant technology information during the simulation of an NC program. In the programming analysis of rotation-symmetrical machining the work phases are represented as machining paths for each tool and the corresponding technology data is acquired. After the analysis the following data referring to the work phases is available as a table: machining diameter area, RPM, cutting speed, feed-in, path, feed-in rate, rapid transfer speed, tool change time, cut volume, cut mass. The analyzed data can be stored in the current NC program where it is correspondingly available for further evaluation.
NC Data Analysis
0.2 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x

Change of Address Letter Due to the application of the address letter C for the programming of the C axis it was necessary to change the address letters.
Old: C (Chamfer, Radius) R (Parameter identification letter) P (Block number, alternative)
New:
R P O C Y B
Address letter for programming of chamfers and radii Address letter for programming of parameters Address letter for programming of block numbers and choice of alternatives Positionable turning axis Additional feed axis for the turret Additional swivel rotation axis for the turret (depending on machine configuration and of the current machining plane) Exception: During contour programming of G72/G73 B remains circle radius.
Summary of some G-commands
When uniforming MTS syntax some of the commands were put together: The previous cycles G87 (radius) and G88 (chamfer) were put together to G88. This cycle can generate both radii and chamfers. The previous cycles G65 (straight roughing cycle, conical contour) and G66 (plane roughing cycle, conical contour) are replaced by the cycle G89.
Some new G commands as syntax extension
To extend the performance of MTS syntax for the NC programming of rotationsymmetrical machining additional addresses were included in some G commands. The parameters of the cycles G81 (straight roughing cycle of any contour) and G82 (plane roughing cycle of any contour) were extended. The parameters E, A, O and Q have been added.
MTS GmbH 1998
11
1. Basic Geometry
Examples
P : P : P :
X= 20, Y= 30 X=-20, Y= 15 X= 40, Y=-25
Diagram 1.1 :
Cartesian Coordinate System
Angles of holes on a divided circle Diagram 1.2
Determination of a point by the length L and the angle A Diagram 1.3
Two-dimensional coordinate system for NC programming for turning Diagram 1.4
12
1.1 Coordinate System
1 Basic Geometry
In this chapter we outline the basic mathematical and technical knowledge, as required for NC programming.
1.1 The Coordinate System

An important part of an NC program is the description of tool motions (distances) and their target points. To ensure correct execution of such commands, the appropriate geometric dimensions must be precisely defined, so as to effect the corresponding tool movement on the machine tool. It follows that a reference system must be determined, within which the position of each desired point can be specified. This is called a coordinate system. Origin of the Coordinate System The coordinate system is composed of two axes at a right angle; each axis is scaled, so that numeral values can be marked off on it. The intersection point of the two axes is the origin (or zero point) of the coordinate system. As a rule the horizontal axis is designated as the X axis, the vertical axis as the Y axis. The coordinate system used for turning is different in that the horizontal axis is designated as Z and the vertical axis is designated as X. A plane coordinate system of this type is called a cartesian coordinate system. Coordinates Example: (see Diagram 1.1) A coordinate system serves to definitely locate each point, by specifying its coordinates (in numeral values) on the X and Y axes. The coordinates of point P1 are: X = 20 and Y = 30, i.e. the location of the point is defined by marking off (from the origin) the value 20 in the positive direction X and the value 30 in the positive direction Y. Accordingly the coordinates of points P2 and P3 are as follows: P2: X=-20, Y=15 Polar Coordinate System P3: X=40, Y=-25
In addition to the cartesian system, polar coordinates are used, e.g. in cases where a large number of angle dimensions must be programmed. Example:Pattern of drilled holes on a circle (see Diagram 1.2) Polar coordinates are used to define the points on a plane by specifying: the length L and the angle A
Coordinate System for CNC Turning
A two-dimensional coordinate system is used for turning. The Z-coordinate is marked off on the horizontal axis, the diameter X is set on the vertical (half) axis (see Diagram 1.4).
MTS GmbH 1998
13
1. Basic Geometry
Diagram 1.5 :
Position and graphic symbols denoting the reference points of a CNC lathe
Diagram 1.6 :
The dimensioning is dependent on the location of the workpiece zero.
Postaxial machining Preaxial machining Diagram 1.7 : The coordinate system is dependent on the tool position
14
1.2 Reference Points
1.2 Reference Points

To ensure that the control system of the machine will read the specified coordinates correctly and effect the corresponding movements of the tool slide, the machine tool has its own "coordinate system", which is called a "reference system". The following reference points are part of this system (see Diagram 1.5): Machine Zero Reference Point The origin of the reference system is called the machine zero (or datum). It is defined by the manufacturer and cannot be modified. A point within the travel range of the turret reference point is determined as the reference point to which the coordinate systems of the slide axes relate. With lathes using an incremental system of coordinates, the tool must be moved to the reference point after each startup of the machine. When absolute measuring systems are employed, it is not necessary to move it to the reference point. The appropriate type of machine can be determined in the configuration program (cf. Configuration Manual). All tool slide movements executed by the control system, according to the specified coordinates, will relate to the tool reference point, which is situated on the front face of the tool mounting. To compute the target position of the tool tip, the control system needs to be informed of the tool compensation value, denoting the distance between the tool reference point and the tool nose. From these differential values the system will compute the distances to the target point. (cf. Section 1.4: Tool Geometry - Compensation Values). The workpiece zero, as related to the machine zero, can be determined at will. It is advisable, however, to define the workpiece zero as identical to the origin (zero point of the coordinate system) of the workpiece design drawing - in this way the dimensions can be read in directly from the drawing. If the workpiece zero is located on the right front face of the workpiece (see Diagram 1.6), the Z coordinates must be programmed with a negative sign. Note: the coordinate system is also dependent on the position of the tool slide, which may be either "in front of" or behind" the centre line as viewed from a position in front of the machine tool (i.e. to the right or the left of the rotational axis of the workpiece, as seen from the drive / clamped side), depending on the make of the lathe (see Diagram 1.7). In this manual the corresponding differentiation of tools and their position are be denoted by the terms "preaxial / postaxial".
Tool Reference Point
Workpiece Zero
F
Tool Position
MTS GmbH 1998
15
1. Basic Geometry
Absolute Dimensioning : All specified dimensions are related to the same point, which is the dimensioning reference point
Incremental Dimensioning: Starting from the origin of the coordinate system, the distance between the current point and the preceding point is measured.
Diagram 1.8
Tool motions according to the absolute dimensioning system: The tool moves to Z 50.
Tool motions according to the incremental dimensioning system: The tool moves by the value 30 in the negative direction Z.
Diagram 1.9
16
1.3 Absolute / Incremental Dimensioning
1.3 Absolute Dimensioning, Incremental Dimensioning (Relative Dimensioning)

The following dimensioning systems are commonly used with design drawings (see Diagram 1.8): Absolute Dimensioning In the absolute system all dimensions relate to the origin (zero point) of the coordinate system, which is also called the dimensioning reference point. (Fixed Zero System)
Incremental Dimensioning
Contrary to the absolute system, the incremental dimensioning system is based on the specification of the distance between a current point and its preceding point on an axis. Because in this system a sequence of additive dimensions is produced, it is called incremental. Depending on the type of dimensioning used in the drawing, the tool motions of an NC program can be programmed either in the absolute or in the incremental system of coordinates. (see Diagram 1.9).
MTS GmbH 1998
17
1. Basic Geometry
Cross turning and roughing tool Diagram 1.10
Finishing tool
Diagram 1.11
The angular position of the reversible tip is greater than the infeed angle Diagram 1.12
The angular position of the reversible tip is less than the infeed angle
18
1.4 Tool Geometry
1.4 Tool Geometry

The applications of a turning tool are determined by its geometry: the tool nose angles of a corner tool for cross turning or roughing, for instance, should be smaller than those of a finishing tool (see. Diagram 1.10). Important parameters of the tool geometry are (see Diagram 1.11) : Tool nose angles Angle of the reversible tip Length / Width of the tool nose Tool nose radius
Further important parameters are (with internal tools): length and diameter of the shank minimum diameter
and (with twist drills): Angular Position of the Reversible Tip diameter maximum drilling depth
F
Minimum Diameter
The angular position of the reversible tip is of critical importance especially with the generation of falling contours, because it determines the maximum possible angle at which the tool feeds down towards the interior of the workpiece (infeed angle). If the angle is less than the angle of the contour to be cut, the contour will be gouged or the tool holder will collide with the workpiece contour. (see Diagram 1.12). The maximum angle at which the tool feeds down into the workpiece should be determined to be, as a rule, 2-3 smaller than the adjustable angular position of the reversible tip.
The minimum diameter of a drilled hole allowing the insertion of a tool (e.g. internal recessing tool) without touching the surface of the workpiece.
MTS GmbH 1998
19
1. Basic Geometry
The tool compensation value in Z is determined by the distance on the Z-axis between the cutting point and the tool reference point. Diagram 1.13 : Tool compensation
The tool compensation values in X and Z are determined by the distances between the tool nose and the tool reference point in the direction of the X and Z axes.
Radius 0,4 Example: Radius 0,4 X=-0,400 X=-0,231 Y=-0,400 Y=-0,400 Diagram 1.14 : The compensation vector determines the position of the tool nose
Example:
Diagram 1.15 :
A comparison of tooling quadrants and TNC vectors (CNC lathe for tooling behind centre)
20
1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage
1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage

In computing the tool motions the control system relates all programmed coordinates to the tool reference point which is situated at the stop face of the tool mounting. Given the various tool geometries, the distance between the tool nose and the reference point will of course vary from tool to tool. It follows that the distance between the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose and the tool reference point must be determined for every tool, so that the actual tool path can be computed. Each of these differential values is stored as a tool compensation value in a corresponding compensation value storage. When a programmed tool change is to be executed in the course of an NC program, the system will read in the applicable compensation value storage, to account for the tool geometry in computing the tool path. Tool nose geometry data are the following: Compensation Values distance in X from the tool reference point distance in Z from the tool reference point radius of the tool nose tooling quadrant or compensation vector
The control system must be informed of the distances in the directions X and Z between the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose and the tool reference point for each tool to be used (see Diagram 1.13). These differential values are stored in corresponding compensation value storages. In computing the feed motion of a selected tool, the control system accounts for the applicable compensation values, to the effect that the tool nose (i.e. the theoretical cutting point) feeds precisely to the programmed target position. In computing the cutter path, the control system assumes a theoretical cutting point. The actual cutting edge of the tool nose however is rounded, with a radius ranging from some tenths of a millimeter to a circular tip. With each tool the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose must be defined by the tool nose compensation vector (TNC vector) to make sure that the control system can compute the path of the actual cutting point in the execution of a cycle. The TNC vector defines the theoretical position of the tool nose (in the directions X and Z) relative to its centre (see Diagram 1.14). The tool management predefines a TNC vector for every tool available in the Simulator system.
Tool Nose Compensation Vector
Quadrants
Alternatively the TNC vector can be determined by eight tooling quadrants (as shown in Diagram 1.15 ). This is common practice and applicable to standard cases. cannot, however, be applied in all cases.
MTS GmbH 1998
21
1. Basic Geometry
P M
Theoretical tool nose (cutting point) Tool nose Centre
The actual cutting point of the reversible tip is dependent on the direction of cut. Diagram 1.16 :
If tool nose compensation is not selected, the actual machining will deviate from the programmed contour on the rising and falling segments of a contour, due to the radius of the tip of the tool.
Diagram 1.17 :
--M
Offset Path Tool Nose Centre
If the tool nose compensation (TNC) is selected the system computes the motion of the tool nose centre on an offset path equidistant to the contour, i.e. the actual cutting point will move exactly along the programmed contour of the workpiece. Diagram 1.18 :
22
1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation (TNC)
1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation TNC

The actual cutting point of the reversible tip will change in the course of machining, according to the direction of motion of the tool. (see Diagram 1.16). In computing the tool motion the control system assumes the movement of the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose along the programmed contour. Every time the tool executes a programmed movement not parallel to either the X- or Z-axis, however, deviations from the desired contour and the corresponding dimensions will occur, due to the radius of the tip of the tool employed (see Diagram 1.17). When tool nose compensation is activated, the control system will compute the path of the centre of the tool nose, equidistant to the contour, accounting for the radius. Taking account of either the tooling quadrant or the TNC vector, the theoretical cutting point is shifted to the centre of the tool nose radius, which will then be computed to move on the path accordingly offset from the programmed contour (see Diagram 1.18).
MTS GmbH 1998
23
2. Introduction into NC Programming
N Block Number G G- Command X Coordinates of the Target Position Z F S T M

Diagram 2.1 : Feed Speed Tool Number/Turret Position Switches and Machine Functions (Spindle, Coolant ...)
Sequence of Words within an NC Block
24
2.1 NC Block Format
2 Introduction into NC Programming

A distinct program structure is essential for the generation of NC programs. Most importantly, the process of detecting eventual program errors will be much facilitated by a clear structure - especially if this task is carried out by a different programmer.
2.1 Structure of an NC Block (Format)

Unlike the conventional lathe, a modern machine tool will be equipped with a numerical control system. The machining of a workpiece can be executed automatically, provided that each operational step has been described in a "language" (code) which can be read by the control system. The collection of coded descriptions referring to a workpiece is called an NC program. Blocks Each NC program comprises a number of so-called blocks, which contain the commands to be executed. These blocks are consecutively numbered; each block number consisting of the letter "N" plus a (e.g. three-digit) numeral. Block numbers appear at the beginning of each program line. As a rule an NC block is comprised of several words. Each word consists of an address (letter) and a value or code (numerals). N110 | Block No. G01 | Word X+60 | Word M03 | Word
Words Address, Value Example
A numeral may either denote a code (e.g. G01: Linear Feed Motion ) or a value (e.g. X+60 : Approaching the Target Coordinate X=60).
Word
Word
Word
| Address
| Code
01
| Address
| Value
60
| Address
0.07
| Value
MTS GmbH 1998
25
2. Introduction into NC Programming
2.2 Modal Commands and Non-modal Commands

Modal commands are self-retentive, i.e. they will take effect in consecutive NC blocks, until they are deleted or overwritten by a command at the same address. Non-modal commands instead are "block-oriented", they will be active only in the block in which they are programmed. Examples of modal commands are: spindle speed, feedrate, sense of rotation, tool selection etc. Once entered, these commands will remain active also with the subsequently programmed blocks. Example: N115 N120 N125 N130 Block No. N115 A feedrate of 0,07 mm/rev and a spindle speed of 1800 r.p.m., with clockwise spindle rotation, is programmed. This technology data is automatically retained to take effect through NC blocks N120 to N130. N120 The tool moves on a straight line (G01) from its current position to the target position Z=-60. N125 Because G01 is a modal command, the tool moves once again on a (vertical) straight line upwards to X=70. N130 The tool moves horizontal to Z=-85 F0.07 G01 X+70 Z-85 S1800 Z-60 M03
Explanation: (see Diagram 2.2)
Diagram 2.2 :
Tool motions effected by modal commands (G01) for roughing
26
2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses
2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses

As a rule, an NC command contains several addresses. These addresses must be discriminated as mandatory addresses (which must be programmed) and optional addresses (which may be programmed). In addition to this there are certain addresses which must always be programmed together (combined addresses) as well as others which cannot be programmed together (alternative addresses). To distinguish between the mandatory and optional addresses, as well as the combined and alternative addresses, in this guide the following mode of representation is applied: Addresses that must be programmed with a specific NC command ("mandatory addresses") appear in a separate NC block, without any additional program information. Example
G96
S...
When the G96 command (constant cutting speed) is programmed, the address S, followed by the desired value, is a mandatory entry to this block.
Addresses which are not mandatory but may instead be programmed with a specific command ("Optional Addresses") appear in brackets in the applicable program line . Example
G78
X...
Z...
L...
O...
[D...]
[I...]
In this example of an NC block, the addresses X, Z, L and O must be programmed. Only the programming of the addresses D and I is optional.
When one of the given addresses must or may be programmed, they appear together, separated by a slash. Example
G75
X...
Z...
S.../D...
In this case one of the addresses S and D must be programmed, i.e. either S or D.
Addresses that must always be programmed together (combined addresses) are written together, without any separating sign. Example
G82
K... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]
If X is programmed, Z must be programmed as well. If R is programmed, V must be programmed as well just so if H is programmed, W must be programmed as well (and vice versa).
MTS GmbH 1998
27
3. Miscellaneous Functions
3 Miscellaneous Functions (M-Functions)

With each NC block a number of additional functions (commonly referred to as miscellaneous functions or M-Functions) can be programmed. These are often machine functions and switches, e.g. to specify the feedrate, the spindle speed and the tool change.
3.1 Activate/Deactivate Spindle M03 M04 M05

Activate Spindle - Right-Hand Rotation (Clockwise) Activate Spindle - Left-Hand Rotation (Counter-Clockwise) De-Activate Spindle
M04: Spindle rotation counter-clockwise The sense of rotation is determined as seen from the drive, i.e. in the line of view of the positive Z-axis.
3.2 Coolant M07 M08 M09 3.3 Programmed Halt M00

After the execution of a block which contains the command M00, the program execution will be halted, to allow gauging of the workpiece. Activate pump - Coolant 1 Activate pump - Coolant 2 De-activate coolant pump
28
3.4 Program End
3.4 Program End M30

This command serves to terminate the program. The spindle rotation and the coolant pump will be deactivated and the automatic program run is terminated. All incremental or rotary zero shifts (G59) are undone (with older types of NC lathes the punched tape will be rewound). The system quits the automatic mode after execution of that NC block in which M02 has been programmed ( with older types of NC lathes the punched tape will not be rewound). This command terminates a subprogram. The control system will return to the main program and continue the program run from the command in the respective program line which is subsequent to the subprogram invocation.
M02 M99
3.5 Lock / Unlock Centre Sleeve M20 M21

If the tailstock has been selected, the M20 command serves to lock the centre sleeve. The M21 command unlocks the sleeve.
3.6 Feedrate F...

The feedrate is programmed in millimeters per revolution (mm/rev) . Example: F000.200
Here the programmed feedrate is 0,2 millimeters per revolution.
Alternatively the feedrate may be programmed in millimeters per minute (see G94 and G95).
3.7 Spindle Speed S...

The spindle speed is programmed in revolutions per minute (RPM) . Example: S1800 Here the programmed spindle speed is 1800 revolutions per minute.
MTS GmbH 1998
29
3. Miscellaneous Functions
3.8 Tool Change T...

A tool change is programmed by a four-digit number at the address T. The first two digits designate the tool position in the turret, the last two digits indicate the tool compensation storage. Example: T0808 Programming of this number effects the insertion of the correct tool at the turret position 8 as well as the concurrent loading of tool compensation storage No. 8. In the CNC Simulator there is a maximum of 16 turret positions available, as well as 99 compensation value storage registers. This provides the opportunity, for example, to assign the compensation value storage No. 36 to the tool in the turret position No. 12, if this seems applicable. The corresponding NC command would then be: T1236
If you decide to program an NC block containing one or several M - functions together with a G-command, please take care to observe the proper sequence of command execution, as listed in the following table:
To be executed prior to the G-command: M03/M04Activate spindle M07/M08Activate coolant M20/M21Lock/Unlock Sleeve F Feedrate S Speed T Tool change
To be executed after the G-command M00 Programmed halt M02 Program end without backspacing M05 De-activate spindle M09 De-activate coolant M30 Program end and backspacing M99 Subprogram end
An NC block may contain a maximum of three M-commands.
30
Rapid Traverse
G00
4 Programming Commands in Compliance with DIN 66025

Table of available DIN commands: G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G09 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G28 G33 G40 G41/G42 G51 G53 G54 - G56, G58 G59 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G96 G97
Rapid Traverse Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion Circular Interpolation Clockwise Circular Interpolation Counter-clockwise Dwell In-Position Programming (Deceleration) Unit of Measurement: (Inch) Unit of Measurement: (mm) Subprogram Invocation Repeated Program Part (Routine) Unconditional Jump Instruction Move to the Reference Point Move to the Tool Changing Position Positioning of the Tailstock Threading Cancel Tool Nose Compensation Tool Nose Compensation to the left/right of the Contour Programmed Contour Cancel Incremental Zero Shift Set Absolute Zero Incremental Zero Shift Activate Absolute Dimensioning Activate Incremental Dimensioning Speed Limitation Feedrate (mm/min) Feedrate (mm/rev) Constant Cutting Speed Cancel Constant Cutting Speed
MTS GmbH 1998
31
G00
Rapid Traverse
Programming Absolute Dimensions: N... G90 N...
N... N115 G00 X+30 Z+5 Diagram G00.1 : Programming absolute dimensions - the tool moves to the point X=30/Z=5. In this example the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the diameter.
Programming Incremental Dimensions: N... G91 N...
N... N115 G00 X-12,5 Z-35 Diagram G00.2 : Programming incremental dimensions - the tool moves in the direction X by the value 12.5 and in the direction Z by the value -35 . Positioning the tool at X+30 / Z+5 will be possible only if the tool has been positioned at X+55, Z+40 (start position) in the preceding block. In this example the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius.
32
Rapid Traverse
G00
4.1 Rapid Traverse G00

Function The tool moves at the maximum possible speed to the target position as programmed by the X- and Z- coordinates. These coordinates may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91).
NC Block
G00 [X...]1)
X Z
1) If
[Z...]1)
[F...]
[S...]
[T...]
[M...]
Optional Addresses
X-Coordinate of the Target Point Z-Coordinate of the Target Point
a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinate will be identical with that of the current tool position. It does not have to be programmed separately, as the coordinate address is self-retentive.
If none of the coordinates in X and Z has been programmed, only the rapid traverse function will be retained. F S T M Programming Hints Feedrate (mm/rev) Speed (RPM) Tool Change Additional Function
If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of spindle speed is programmed within the same NC block, the tool change will be executed first; the change of speed is effected at the beginning of the tool movement, while at the same time the feedrate value is entered to the register. A maximum of three M-commands may be programmed; their respective order of execution is described in Section 3 ("Miscellaneous Functions").
When absolute dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the diameter of the workpiece. When incremental dimensioning (G91) is operative, the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius of the workpiece.
MTS GmbH 1998
33
G01
Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion
Example for Programming Absolute Dimensions: N... G90 N...
N... N115 G01 X+140 Z-90 Diagram G01.1 : Programming absolute dimensions - the tool moves to the point X=140, Z=-90. The X-coordinate is programmed relative to the diameter.
Example for Programming Incremental Dimensions N... G91 N...
N... N115 G01 X+20 Z-60
Diagram G01.2 :
Programming incremental dimensions - the tool moves in the direction X by the value 20 and in the direction Z by the value-60 . Positioning the tool at X+140, Z-90 will be possible only if the tool has been positioned at X+100, Z-30 (start position) in the previous block. The X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius.
34
Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion
G01
4.2 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01

Function The tool moves at the programmed feedrate to the target position as determined by the X- and Z- coordinates. These coordinates may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91).
NC Block Optional Addresses
G01 [X...]1)
X Z
1) If
[Z...]1)
[F...]
[S...]
[T...]
[M...]
X-Coordinate of the Target Point Z-Coordinate of the Target Point
a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinate will be identical with that of the current tool position. It does not have to be programmed separately, as the coordinate address is self-retentive. If none of the coordinates in X and Z has been programmed, only the slow feed function will be retained. F S T M Feedrate (mm/rev) Speed (RPM) Tool Change Additional Function
Programming Hints
If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has been programmed within the same NC block, these functions will be executed before the tool is moved to the target position. A maximum of three M-commands may be programmed; their respective order of execution is described in Section 3 ("Miscellaneous Functions"). When absolute dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the diameter of the workpiece. When incremental dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius of the workpiece.
MTS GmbH 1998
35
G02
Clockwise Circular Interpolation
4.3 Clockwise Circular Interpolation G02

Function NC Block Optional Addresses The tool will move at the programmed feedrate clockwise on a circular arc to the target position as defined by the coordinates in X and Z.
G02 [X...]1) [Z...]1) [I...]2) [K...]2) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

X X-Coordinate of the target point When absolute dimensions are programmed (G91), X relates to the workpiece diameter. When incremental dimensions are programmed (G91), X relates to the workpiece radius. Z-Coordinate of the target point
Z
1) If
a target coordinate is identical to the corresponding coordinate of the current tool position, it does not have to be programmed, as the coordinate address is selfretentive. I K Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and the circle centre in the direction X, relative to the radius). Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and the circle centre in the direction Z).
2) When
I or K (as described above) are not programmed, the respective centre coordinate is set to zero. F S T M Feedrate (mm/rev) Spindle Speed (RPM) Tool Change Additional Function
Programming Example: N110 G01 X+80 Z-40 N115 G02 X+140 Z-106 I+45 K-20
Programming Hints
The coordinates X and Z may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91). The default mode for definition of centre coordinates I and K is incremental (relative to the starting point). In the configuration program for the control system for turning the centre dimensioning can be set to the absolute system (see Configuration Manual). If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has been programmed within the same NC block, these commands will be executed before the tool is moved to the target position.
36
Counter-Clockwise Circular Interpolation
G03
4.4 Circular Interpolation Counter-Clockwise G03

Function NC Block Optional Addresses The tool will move at the programmed feedrate counter-clockwise on a circular arc to the target position as defined by the coordinates in X and Z.
G03 [X...]1) [Z...]1) [I...]2) [K...]2) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

X X-Coordinate of the target point When absolute dimensions are programmed (G91), X is related to the workpiece diameter. When incremental dimensions are programmed (G91), X is related to the radius of the workpiece. Z-Coordinate of the target point
Z
1) If
a target coordinate is identical to the corresponding coordinate of the current tool position, it does not have to be programmed, as the coordinate address is selfretentive. I K Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and the centre of the circle in the direction X, relative to the radius). Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and the centre of the circle in the direction Z).
2) When
I or K (as described above) are not programmed, the respective centre coordinate is set to zero. F S T M Feedrate (mm/rev) Spindle Speed (RPM) Tool Change Additional Function
Programming Example: N110 G01 X+80 Z-50 N115 G03 X+140 Z-80 I-15 K-45
Programming Hints
The coordinates X and Z may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91). The default mode for definition of centre coordinates I and K is incremental (relative to the starting point). In the configuration program for the control system for turning, the centre dimensioning can be set to the absolute system (see Configuration Manual). If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has been programmed within the same NC block, these commands will be executed before the tool is moved to the target position.
MTS GmbH 1998
37
G04
Dwell
4.5 Dwell G04

Function NC Block Addresses The tool movement is halted for the specified dwell time.
G04
X
X...
Dwell time in seconds
Programming example N120 G04 X2 Programming Hints The dwell time must be specified in seconds, at the address X. The G04 command must be programmed in a separate NC block.
4.6 polygonal machining G08

Function Condition NC Block Optional Addresses The function G08 serves to machine an N polygon. The selected machining plane is the turning plane G14!
G08 O... V... W... [C...]

O V Number of corners of the N-polygon Length of the N-polygon V is positive: the length is from the actual postion incremental in positive Z direction V is negative: the length is from the actual postion incremental in negative Z direction Width of the N-polygon N is an even number: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of two opposite areas. N is an uneven number: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of one side to the opposite area. rotary angle of the N-polygon
C Programming example 3D view of an hexagon
N50 G08 O006 V-072.000 W+040.00
38
In-Position Programming (Deceleration)
G09
4.7 In-Position Programming (Deceleration) G09

Function When G09 is programmed as part of an NC block, the feedrate will be decelerated to zero as the programmed contour point is approached. After the standstill at precisely the programmed position, the tool motion is resumed and the the next contour point, as programmed in the subsequent NC block, is approached.
NC Block
G01 [X...]1) [X...]1)

1) If
[Z...]1) G09
G09
or
[Z...]1)
a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinate is identical to that of the current tool position. It does not have to be programmed, as the coordinate address is self-retentive. As NC programs are executed continuously, i.e. without interruption of the feed motion, position errors such as lags or overshots may occur. To move the tool precisely to the programmed coordinates, the G09 command must be programmed.
Explanation:
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+40 Z-20 N115 G01 X+100 Z-35 G09 N120 G01 X+130 Z-60 G09 N125 G01 X+140 Z-95
Programming Hints
The G09 command must be programmed at the end of the NC block.
MTS GmbH 1998
39
G20 4.8 Inch Data Input G20

Function NC Block
Inch Data Input
This command switches the unit of measurement from millimeters to inches.
G20
When this function has been programmed, all coordinate values must be specified in inches. Accordingly the units of the following technology data will change: 1. 2. the feedrate is specified in inches per revolution (in/rev) instead of millimeters per revolution (mm/rev) the cutting speed is specified in feet per minute (f/min) instead of meters per minute (m/min).
Explanation
Programming Hints
The G20 command must be programmed in a separate NC block. Switching the unit of measurement only takes effect within the current NC block. Inches will be the active unit of measurement until the system is switched back (by G21) to the millimeter unit. At the end of each program (M30) the control system will automatically return to the configured unit of measurement.
40
Metric Data Input (mm)
G21
4.9 Metric Data Input (mm) G21

Function This command serves to switch the unit of measurement from inches to millimeters.
NC Block
G21
When this function has been programmed, all coordinate values must be specified in millimeter. Accordingly the units of the following technology data will change: 1. 2. the feedrate is specified in millimeters per revolution (mm/rev) instead of inches per revolution (in/rev) the cutting speed is specified in meters per minute (m/min) instead of feet per minute (f/min).
Explanation
Programming Hints
The G21 command must be programmed in a separate NC block. Switching the unit of measurement only takes effect within the current NC block. Millimeters will be the active unit of measurement until the system is switched back (by G21) to the inch unit. At the end of each program (M30) the control system will automatically return to the configured unit of measurement.
MTS GmbH 1998
41
G22
Subprogram Invocation
Programming Example: N... G22 U1234 N...
N... N... G22 U5678
Diagram G22.1 :
Invocation of various subroutines from a main program
Programming Example: N... /01 G22 U1234 N...
N... N... /02 G22 U1234
Diagram G22.2 :
Multiple invocation of a subprogram from a main program, wihth the omission of certain NC blocks (optional block skip).
42
Subprogram Invocation
G22
4.10 Invocation of a Subprogram G22

Function After a subprogram invoked by the command G22 has been executed by the control system, the main program will be resumed from the next block.
NC Block Addresses Optional Addresses
[/...] G22
U O Q S /
U...
[O...]
[Q...]
[S...]
At the address U the name of the subprogram must be programmed. number of the block where the subprogram starts. number of the block where the subprogram ends. states the number of repetitions of the subprogram execution The slash code serves to denote those NC blocks which are to be omitted in the execution of the subprogram (see explanation below).
Explanation
The programming of subroutines is recommended for the repeated execution of certain program parts, e.g. for the "roughing" and then "finishing" of a contour. When these cycles are executed as subprograms, repeated programming of the contour becomes unneccessary. Further subprograms can be invoked from a subprogram; up to eight subprograms can be nested. The address "/" (slash code) causes the control system to omit ("skip") certain NC blocks during a subprogram run. A selection of blocks marked to be skipped constitutes a "level" of block omissions, several of which may be defined for each subprogram, e.g.: those blocks which have been skipped in the first execution of the subprogram (level 1) will be executed during the second run of the same subprogram (level 2). Conversely: The set of blocks executed at the first invocation of the subprogram will be marked to be skipped in the second run. Example (see Diagram G22.2 on the previous page): During the first execution of the subprogram (/01 U1234) the control system will skip all NC blocks marked by /01. During the second run of the same subprogram (/02 U1234) the control system will skip all NC blocks marked by /02.
Optional Block Skip
Programming Hints
Programming of the addresses O, Q and S is not mandatory: if O and Q have not been programmed, the complete subprogram will be executed. if S has not been programmed, only a single subprogram run will be executed. At the end of each defined subprogram the command M99 must be programmed, to cause the control system to return to the main program, or to the subprogram from which the current subprogram has been invoked. This return condition may be edited in the configuration program (cf. the Configuration Manual: Subprograms).
MTS GmbH 1998
43
G23
Repeated Program Parts
4.11 Repeated Program Parts G23

Function NC Block The command G23 causes the repetition of a program part.
G23
O Q
O...
Q...
[S...]
Addresses
Start Block Number: Number of the main program block at which the repeated part starts. End Block Number: Number of the main program block at which the repeated part ends. Number of repetitions: The value programmed at the address S determines the desired number of repetitions of the program part.
Optional Addresses
Programming Example: N190 G23 O160 Q180
Programming Hints
Programming the addresses O and Q is mandatory. If the address S is not programmed, a single repetition of the specified program part will be executed. Programming a repeated part of a subprogram is not allowed. Modal commands are not affected by program part repetition.
44
Unconditional Jump
G24
4.12 Unconditional Jump G24

Function The command G24 instructs the control system to continue the machining from the NC block programmed at the address O.
NC Block
G24
O
O...
Target Block Number: At this address the number of the main program block must be specified from which the program execution will be continued.
Addresses
Programming Example: N110 G24 O185 Programming Hints Programming a jump instruction as part of a subprogram is invalid.
MTS GmbH 1998
45
G25
move to the Reference Point
4.13 Move to the Reference Point G25

Function With the command G25 you go to the reference point of the CNC machine in rapid speed. To define the rapid speed movement and the reference point call G25 and enter the values. For this purpose the optional addresses O and Q are available.
G25 [F...] [S...] [M...] [O...] [Q...]

F S M Infeed Number of spindle rotations Switch or machine functions When programming G25 three M commands can be programmed simultaneously
The addresses O and Q can be programmed several times within the NC command G25, and each time with different values. If neither of the addresses O and Q is programmed the turret reference point in rapid speed movement is moved linear in X and Z (i.e. the shortest way) to the reference point. Please, consider the present tool position when programming the command G25 to guarantee a collision-free movement of the turret O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 Q0 Q1 going to the reference point with linear interpolation of the coordinates X and Z (standard) going to the reference point only in X coordinate (Z remains unchanged) going to the reference point in the Z coordinate (X remains unchanged) going to the reference point first in the X coordinate and then in the Z coordinate going to the reference point first in the Z coordinate and then in the X coordinate going to the reference point with the tool holder reference point (standard) going to the reference point with the tool carrier reference point
Programming Hints
For the programming of the command G25 no coordinate entries are needed as the location of the reference point is specified in the machine configuration and it is consequently known to the CNC control. Within the MTS CNC simulator the set-up can be made in the configuration of the CNC machine.
46
Move to the Tool-Changing Position
G26
4.14 Move to the Tool-Changing Position G26

Function With the command G26 the tool change point can be approached in rapid speed movement. In G26 the rapid speed movement can be specified in detail. For this purpose the optional addresses O and Q are used
G26 [F...] [S...] [M...] [O...] [Q...]

F S M Infeed Number of spindle rotations Switch or machine functions When programming G26 three M commands can be programmed simultaneously
The addresses O and Q can be programmed several times within the NC command G26, and each time with different values. If neither of the addresses O and Q is programmed the turret reference point in rapid speed movement is moved linear in X and Z (i.e. the shortest way) to the reference point. Please, consider the present tool position when programming the command G26 to guarantee a collision-free movement of the turret O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 Q0 Q1 going to the tool change point with linear interpolation of the coordinates X and Z (standard) going to the tool change point only in X coordinate (Z remains unchanged) going to the tool change point in the Z coordinate (X remains unchanged) going to the tool change point first in the X coordinate and then in the Z coordinate going to the tool change point first in the Z coordinate and then in the X coordinate going to the tool change point with the tool holder reference point (standard) going to the tool change point with the tool carrier reference point
Programming Hints
For the programming of the command G26 no coordinate entries are needed as the location of the reference point is specified in the machine configuration and it is consequently known to the CNC control. Within the MTS CNC simulator the set-up can be made in the configuration of the CNC machine. Determination of the coordinates of the tool changing position is part of the configuration (see the Configuration Manual).
F
MTS GmbH 1998
47
G28
positioning the Tailstock
4.15 Positioning the Tailstock G28

Note In the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6 a CNC machine with a counter spindle has the command G28 that means Machining on the counter spindle. For a machine without a counter spindle the command G28 means Positioning the Tailstock Function NC Block The G28 command serves to move the tailstock in the course of an NC program.
G28 Z...
Z Z-Coordinate of the target point (absolute)
Addresses
Programming Example: N190 G28 Z120
Programming Hints
The G28 command must be programmed as a separate NC block.
48
Thread Cutting
G33
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+80 Z+10 N115 G33 X+80 Z-80 F2,5
Diagram G33.1 :
Cylinder thread
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+40 Z+10 N115 G33 X+100 Z-70 F3
Diagram G33.2 :
Taper thread
MTS GmbH 1998
49
G33
Thread Cutting
4.16 Thread Cutting G33 (Chasing Cycle)

Function The G33 command serves to program a thread cutting cycle. Feedrate and spindle speed will be automatically adapted to the programmed lead.
NC Block
G33 X...
X Z F
Z...
F...
Addresses
X-coordinate of the target point Z-coordinate of the target point Lead
Explanation
When only G33 is programmed, the thread will be cut in a single pass. If thread cutting in consecutive steps is desired, each step must be programmed as a separate NC block. The current tool position at the cycle invocation will be considered as the starting point. It follows that the tool must have been positioned at the desired starting point by appropriate programming in the previous block. Conversely with threading cycle G31 the starting point is computed by the control system. Whether a cylinder thread or a taper thread results from the machining is dependent on the position of the programmed end point in relation to the starting point.
Programming Hints
With cylinder and taper threads <= 45 the lead F is marked off on the Z-axis cross. With taper threads of > 45 the lead value is entered on the X-axis (see Diagram G33.2). Alternatively the lead F may be programmed at addresses I (direction X) and K (direction Z). The greater of the two values should be entered and the smaller value will be computed by the system. Each threading pass must be programmed separately, just as the feed adjustment, and the retreat and return motions must each be programmed in a separate NC block.
50
Tool Nose Compensation
G41 / G42
Programming Example: N170 G81 X+76 Z+4 I+7 N175 G41 N180 (Contour Description)
N235 G40 N240 G80 Diagram G41 : Tool Nose Compensation to the Left of the Contour
Programming Example: N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6 N175 G42 N180 (Contour Description)
N235 G40 N240 G80 Diagram G42 : Tool Nose Compensation to the Right of the Contour
MTS GmbH 1998
51
G41 / G42
Tool Nose Compensation
4.17 Tool Nose Compensation G41 / G42 - to the Left of the Contour G41 - to the Right of the Contour G42
Function In computing the feed motion, the control system assumes the (theoretical) path of the tool tip along the programmed contour. Depending on the radius of the tool nose , however, the resulting contour and its dimensions will be different from the programmed contour whenever the tool motion is not parallel to the X or Z axis (see Diagrams G41 and G42). If tool nose compensation (TNC) is selected, the system will compute an offset path (equidistant) for the tool tip, accounting for the actual radius of the tool nose as well as for the position of the theoretical tool nose (cutting point) relative to the tip centre. In this calculation the tooling quadrant or the compensation vector (TNC vector) of the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose are used. In this way the desired contour can be programmed directly from the workpiece drawing; transformatory calculations become unneccessary (cf. Section1.6: Tool Geometry, ff.). The qualifications left / right apply to the direction in which the tool travels along the contour. NC Block
G41 G42
Compensation to the right of the contour (viewed in cutting direction) Compensation to the left of the contour (viewed in cutting direction)
Programming Hints
If tool nose compensation (TNC) has been activated for a program part, the following must be observed: As long as tool nose compensation is selected, no zero shifts (G53 to G56, G58 and G59) can be effected. When TNC is selected only the cycles G78, G85, G87 and G88 can be invoked. No tool changing functions can be programmed. Radii of internal corner roundings must be greater than the radius of the tool nose. When TNC is selected, the commands M05 and M09 will be ignored.
4.18 Cancel Tool Nose Compensation G40

Function The G40 command cancels tool nose compensation effected by the commands G41 and G42 .
NC Block Programming Hints
G40
The G40 command must be programmed as a separate NC block.
52
Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position
G48
4.19 In Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position G48

Function With the command G48 it is possible to program travel movements in rapid speed. Unlike the standard command G00 the programmed target position is approached in case of G48 not with the cutting edge point but either with the tool carrier reference point (standard) or with the tool holder reference point (switch Q1). How the programmed target position is approached can be defined with the optional address O.
NC command
Addresses Optional addresses
G48 X... Z... [O...] [Q...]

The addresses O and Q can be programmed several times and respectively with different values within the NC command G48 X, Z O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 Q0 Q1 Coordinates of the target point of the tool movement moving to the target position with linear interpolation of the coordinates X and Z (standard) moving to the target position in X coordinate only (Z remains unchanged) moving to the target position in Z coordinate only (X remains unchanged) moving to the target position first in X then in Z coordinate moving to the target position first in Z then in X coordinate moving to the target position with the reference point of the tool support (standard) moving to the target position with the reference point of the work fixture
MTS GmbH 1998
53
G51
Description of a Final Contour
Programming Example: N170 G51 X+0 Z+0 O001 Q001 N175 (Contour Description)
N285 G50
Diagram G51 :
Automatic overlay display of the workpiece contour onto the blank.
54
Description of a Final Contour
G51
4.20 Description of a Final Contour G51

Function In the Simulator, NC program blocks can be generated by "manual" positioning of the tools, i.e. without entering a command code. This way of creating a program is part of the so-called Teach-In mode (see the Simulator Operation Manual for a detailed description). To avoid collisions in the manual mode, the commands G51 and G50 should be used in determining the final contour of the workpiece.
NC Block
G51 X...
Z...
O...
Q...
G50
Addresses X Z X-Coordinate of the first contour point Z-Coordinate of the first contour point
O001 Overlay display of the final contour onto the blank O000 No overlay display of the final contour Q001 Collision monitoring operative During the manual tooling an accoustic alarm indicates any possible collisions with the programmed final contour; a corresponding error message appears in the dialogue line. Q000 No collision monitoring Explanation The command G51 and the subsequent address values (X and Y to define the beginning point of the contour, O and Q to select the desired options) must be entered prior to generation of the contour. The easiest way to determine a contour is by employing the WOP functions (see below: Segment Contour Programming). Entering the G50 command terminates the contour generation. After this, the user must return to the Teach-In mode for manual tooling. For a more detailed description of the Teach-In mode, please refer to the CNC Simulator Operation Manual. Programming Hints To ensure an error-free graphic display of the programmed final contour, the contour definition must be complete, i.e. the starting point as well as the end point must be situated on the centre line (rotation axis).
MTS GmbH 1998
55
G54 - G56 and G58

Blank: The reference point is the machine datum
Define Workpiece Zero Point
Diagram G54.1
Programming Example: N10 G54 X+0 Z+200
Diagram G54.2:
To generate the contour in this example the workpiece zero point is positioned on the face end of the workpiece (G54).
Diagram G54.3 :
To execute the recessing cuts in this example the workpiece zero point is positioned off the rotation axis (G56).
56
Define Workpiece Zero Point
G54 - G56 and G58
4.21 Define Workpiece Zero - Absolute: G54 - G56 and G58

Function The workpiece zero is set at the position defined by the programmed X and Z coordinates, related to the machine datum. A total of four different zero points may be defined and stored.
NC Block
G54 [X...] [Z...] or G55 [X...] [Z...] or G56 [X...] [Z...] or G58 [X...] [Z...]
Addresses Explanation
X Z
X-Coordinate of the current workpiece zero Z-Coordinate of the current workpiece zero
As mentioned above, the control system will interpret all specified coordinates as related to a previously defined zero point, which may be the datum (see Diagram G54.1) or a workpiece zero determined by touching the part. Furthermore a specific workpiece zero can be defined at will for each NC program. To avoid additional computing efforts in the programming, however, it should be positioned in a way that as many coordinate values as possible can be immediately read in as specified in the workshop drawing. With turning workpieces, in most cases the zero point will be situated on the rotational axis (X=0) on the front face of the part (see Diagram G54.2). To facilitate the programming of complex contours (see the recessing cuts shown in Diagram G54.3) it is advisable to define a new zero in compliance with the coordinate system of the design drawing. Using the commands G54, G55, G56 and G57 up to four different workpiece zero points can be defined - the respective coordinates may either be specified in the applicable program line or pre-defined and stored in the set-up mode, by setting the axes to zero or touching the workpiece (for details, see the CNC Simulator Manual). Each stored zero point can be activated by the corresponding address in the NC program (e.g.: G56 - see Diagram G54.3).
Programming Hints
A zero point storage is assigned to each of the four G-commands G54, G56 and G58. The command G54, for example, will also activate the corresponding G54 zero point storage. If one or two coordinate addresses are programmed together with G54, the applicable values are entered to the zero point storage prior to activating the zero. Alternatively these coordinates may be defined in the setup mode, by touching the workpiece. Coordinate values of the current zero point always relate to the machine zero, even when several origins are defined within the same NC program, i.e. a workpiece zero is always determined in absolute coordinates. The defined zero points are self-retentive: they will remain operative, even after a change of program, until they are overwritten. After a restart of the CNC Simulator, all coordinates are set to zero. In the CNC Simulator the position of the machine zero can be defined in the configuration program (see the Configuration Manual for a detailed description).
MTS GmbH 1998
57
G59
Incremental Zero Shift
Diagram G59.1 :
The origin of the coordinate system is shifted to the absolute coordinates X=40 / Z=100 .
Programming Example: N110 G59 X+40 Z+100 I+20 K-30 A+120
Diagram G59.2 :
The coordinate system is first shifted to the point X=40 / Z= 100 and then rotated by 120 about the point defined by the incremental coordinates I=-20K=-30.
58
Incremental Zero Shift
G59
4.22 Incremental Zero Shift G59

Function NC Block Addresses The command G59 serves to shift and concurrently rotate the coordinate system.
G59 X...
X Z
Z...
[I...]
[K...]
[A...]
value by which the intermediate coordinate system is shifted along the Xaxis. value by which the intermediate coordinate system is shifted along the Zaxis. X-coordinate of the rotation centre, incremental to the currently shifted intermediate origin Z-coordinate of the rotation centre, incremental to the currently shifted intermediate origin Rotation angle, incremental
Optional Addresses
I K A
Explanation
In many cases the programming of complex workpiece contours can be much facilitated by defining a so-called "intermediate reference point" (i.e. a temporary coordinate system, to which the dimensioning will relate, instead of the original system). The command G59 serves to shift and/or rotate the coordinate system as desired. If only a shift of the coordinate system is intended, the origin of the new system can be defined by setting up the applicable X and Z-coordinates. In this case it is not necessary to program the addresses I, K and A (see Diagram G59.1). If additionally a rotation of the coordinate system about a specific point is desired, this centre of rotation must be programmed at addresses I and K, as well as the rotation angle at address A. The values for I and K must be programmed incrementally, i.e. relative to the shifted (intermediate) coordinate system (see Diagram G59.2). To rotate the shifted coordinate system about its origin, only angle A needs to be programmed. Subsequently programmed coordinate values relate to the shifted and/or rotated coordinate system. They will be retained until the temporary system is cancelled or a further shift is effected by the G59 command (cf. the G53 command).
Programming Hints
Any shift effected by the command G59 applies to the current origin (which itself may have been set by a G59 shift). Remember that the rotation angle increases accordingly when repeated zero shifts are effected within the same program.
MTS GmbH 1998
59
G53
Cancel Zero Shift
4.23 Cancel Incremental Zero Shift G53

Function The command G53 serves to cancel an incremental zero shift (cf. G59). The original coordinate system as previously determined by an absolute zero shift or by touching of the workpiece is again adapted.
NC Block
G53
The command G53 must be programmed as a separate NC block
Programming Hints
60
Absolute Dimensions
G90
4.24 Activate Absolute Dimensions G90

Function When the command G90 is programmed, all subsequently entered coordinate values relate to the workpiece zero. The target position, to which the tool shall move, is programmed in absolute coordinates, regardless of the current tool position.
NC Block
G90
Programming Example: N... G90 N...
N... N115 G01 X+140 Z-90
Programming Hints
When absolute dimensions are specified, the X coordinate is related to the diameter. The absolute coordinate system remains operative until it is deactivated by G91 (activating the incremental dimensioning).
MTS GmbH 1998
61
G91
Incremental Dimensions
4.25 Activate Incremental Dimensions G91

Function When the incremental system (also called the relative system) is activated, the programmed coordinates of the target position relate to the actual tool position; i.e. the values (distances) must be specified by which the tool will move along the respective axis from the current position.
NC Block
G91
Programming Example: N... G91 N...
N... N115 G01 X+20 Z-60
Programming Hints
When incremental dimensions are specified, the X coordinate relates to the radius. The incremental coordinate system remains operative until it is deactivated by G90 (activating the absolute dimensioning)
62
Spindle Speed Limitation
G92
4.26 Spindle Speed Limitation G92

Function When a constant cutting speed (G96) is programmed for cross turning down to a zero diameter, the spindle will accelerate to its maximum speed. To prevent possibly serious problems with the workpiece clamping, the programming of a spindle speed limitation (G92) together with the constant cutting speed is recommended.
NC Block
G92 S...
S Maximum Spindle Speed (RPM)
Addresses
Programming Example: N110 G92 S1500 Programming Hints The spindle speed limitation will only take effect if a constant cutting speed (G96) has been programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
63
G94
Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute)
4.27 Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute) G94

Function The command G94 serves to program the feedrate. The unit of measurement is "Millimeters per Minute".
NC Blocks
G94 F...
F Feedrate (mm/min)
Addresses
Programming Example: N120 G94 F500.000 In this example the feedrate is 500 millimeters per minute.
If the unit of measurement has been switched from millimeters to inches (see NC command G20), the programmed feedrate will be interpreted accordingly in inches per minute.
64
Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution)
G95
4.28 Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution) G95

Function The command G95 serves to program the feedrate per revolution. The measuring unit is millimeters.
NC Block
G95 F...
F Feedrate (mm/rev)
Addresses
Programming Example: N080 G95 F000.300
In this example the feedrate is 0.3 millimeters per revolution. When the unit of measurement is switched from millimeters to inches (see NC command G20), the programmed feedrate will be interpreted accordingly in inches per revolution.
MTS GmbH 1998
65
G96
Constant Cutting Speed
4.29 Constant Cutting Speed G96

Function NC Block The command G96 serves to program a constant cutting speed.
G96 S...
S F T M
[F...]
[T...]
[M...]
Addresses Optional Addresses
Cutting Speed (m/min) Feedrate (mm/rev) Tool Change Additional Function
Explanation
With turning operations the surface cutting speed is dependent on the programmed spindle speed as well as on the current X-coordinate of the tool nose. To keep the cutting speed constant, the result from the multiplication of the speed and the tool nose coordinate in X must be kept as a constant value in the control system. When smaller X-coordinate values are specified, the spindle speed will increase accordingly. Programming Example: N125 G96 S210
Programming Hints
When the machining requires small X-coordinate values, the command G92 should be programmed to limit the spindle speed, so as to avoid exceeding the maximum speed permissible with the clamping device. If the addresses F, T and M have been defined in a previous block, they need not be programmed once again in the G 96 block. The constant cutting speed remains operative until it is deactivated by G97 or is overwritten by another G96 command.
4.30 Cancel Constant Cutting Speed G97

Function NC Block Optional Addresses Programming Hints The command G97 serves to cancel the constant cutting speed command G96.
G97 [S...]
S Spindle speed in RPM
If no spindle speed S is programmed in the G97 block, the speed computed at the last activation of the constant cutting speed command G96 will be retained. The maximum spindle speed, as programmed in G92, will also be retained for future invocations of the G96 command.
66
5. Cycles
5 Cycles 5.1 Complete Table of Available Cycles

Available Cycle G31 G36 G57 G60 G61 G62 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G69 G75 G76 G78 G79 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89
Threading Cycle Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles Finishing Allowance Face Milling Cycle (with Driven Tools) Drilling Cycle (with Driven Tools) Thread Tapping (with Driven Tools) Reaming/Boring (with Driven Tools) Square Pocket/Groove (with Driven Tools) Circular Pocket (with Driven Tools) Tapping (with Driven Tools) Cycle on a Circle (with Driven Tools) Cycle on a Radius (with Driven Tools) Cycle at a Point (with Driven Tools) Straight Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contours Cross Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contours Clearance Cutting Cycle G78 / DIN 509 Type E and F Thread Undercut / DIN 76 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle Deep Drilling Cycle Clearance Cutting Cycle G85 / DIN 509 Type E and F Thread Undercut / DIN 76 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses Recessing Cycle for any Contour Radius/Chamfer Cycle Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour)
Pages
69 72 73 262 and 304 264, 278, 293 and 306 265, 279, 294 and 307 266, 280, 295 and 308 267, 281, 296 and 309 268, 282, 297 and 310 270, 283, 298 and 311 270, 284, 299 and 312 271, 285, 300 and 313 272, 286, 301 and 314 77 79 81 85 85 107 88 98 111 115 117 123 124 131 135
MTS GmbH 1998
67
G31
Threading Cycle
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+140 Z+10 N115 G31 X+80 Z-80 A+30 D-2 F3 S6
Diagram G31.1 :
Single thread - the Z-coordinate of the starting point is identical with the Z-coordinate of the theoretical start of the thread.
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+25 Z+3 N115 G31 X+20 Z-37 D+1.534 F2.5 J+0.3 Diagram G31.2 : Single thread - the tool adjustment in X and Z per cutting pass is programmed at the addresses J and K.
68
Threading Cycle
G31
5.2 Threading Cycle G31

Function The G31 cycle serves to program traverse and taper threads with a constant lead at a maximum angle of 45 to the Z-axis. This cycle may be employed with external as well as internal machining.
NC Block or Addresses
G31 X... Z... D... F... S.../J... [A...] [Q...] [I.../E...] G31 X...
X
Z...
D...
F...
K...
A...
[Q...]
[I.../E...]
X-Coordinate of the theoretical end of the thread: - determines the nominal diameter with external threads - determines the core diameter with internal threads. Z-Coordinate of the theoretical end point of the thread. Depth of the thread relative to the radius. Lead in the Z- direction. Number of cutting operations. Infeed per cutting pass in the direction X (relating to the radius). Infeed per cutting pass in the direction Z. If the address K is programmed, a thread angle greater than zero must also be programmed. Thread angle to the X-axis determining the infeed. The value entered at A must be between 0 and 60 degrees. Segmentation of the final feed adjustment. Any positive value may be entered at Q . When Q is programmed, the final feed adjustment will be divided into four steps:1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/8 of the previous cutting depth. Difference of radii between the theoretical start and end of the thread: - positive sign for external threads - negative sign for internal threads Thread angle to the Z-axis at the end of the thread. The absolute value entered at E must not exceed 45 degrees.
Z D F S J K
Optional Addresses
A Q
E Explanation
The theoretical start and end of the thread, defining the minor diameter (thread core), constitute important parameters for the execution of the threading cycle G31 The end of the thread is determined by X- and Z-coordinates, while the theoretical start is established by the system from the programmed addresses. the X-coordinate will be computed according to the values entered at the addresses I or E . If neither I nor E has been programmed, the X-coordinate of the start is equal to the X-coordinate of the end (cylinder thread). the Z-coordinate of the start of the thread is always equal to the Z-coordinate of the starting point when the cycle invoked.
MTS GmbH 1998
69
G31
Threading Cycle
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+140 Z+10 N115 G31 X+100 Z-75 D+1.34 F3 S4 E+30
Diagram G31.3 :
Taper thread - the thread angle can be programmed either by the address E (angle to the Z-axis) or by the address I (difference between the radii at the theoretical start and end of the thread).
Programming Example: N110 G00 X+140 Z+10 N115 G31 X+100 Z-75 A+30 D-2 F3 S4
Diagram G31.4 :
Internal thread - the X-coordinate of the starting point must be less than the X-coordinate of the theoretical start of the thread.
70
Threading Cycle
G31
Prior to the invocation of cycle G31 the starting point must be approached in the directions X and Z. The system will then discern internal and external threading by reading the difference between the starting position and the programmed Xcoordinate: If the X-coordinate of the starting point is less than the coordinate of the theoretical end of the thread, an internal thread cut will be executed (see Diagram G31.4). If the X-value is greater, an external thread cut will be executed (see Diagram G31.1).
When the address S is not programmed the control system will compute the number of cuts from the programmed addresses. After each cutting pass the tool returns to the Z-coordinate of the starting position in rapid motion. After completion of the cycle the tool returns to the starting position. Programming Hints As the Z-coordinate of the starting point is equal to the Z-coordinate of the theoretical start of the thread, the starting point must be determined at a sufficient distance from the workpiece, to ensure the necessary path velocity (speed x feedrate) has been reached before the tool engages in the workpiece. Accordingly, the deceleration rate of the drive must be accounted for when programming the theoretical end of the thread. The number of programmed cutting operations must be greater than one.
MTS GmbH 1998
71
G36
Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles
5.3 Travel Range Limitation G36 for Multipass Cycles

The G36 command serves to limit the travel range of the tool when the multipass cycle G83 is executed. For a more detailed explanation, see the description of the contouring cycle G83 below.
72
Finishing Allowance
G57
5.4 Finishing Allowance G57

Function With command G57 it is possible to program finishing allowance for roughing cycles. The roughing cycle called below (e.g. G81) then generates a contour which is shifted by the value of the finishing allowance in X, Z or equidistant.
NC Command Addresses
G57 [X...] [Z...] [B...]

X Finishing allowance in X (with reference to the diameter) When programming finishing allowance in X the following sign rules have to be considered: a positive sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of the positive X axis a negative sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of the negative X axis Z Finishing allowance in Z When programming finishing allowance in Z the following sign rules have to be considered: a positive sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of the positive Z axis a negative sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of the negative Z axis B equidistant finishing allowance in X and Z The programming of an equidistant finishing allowance is always necessary if the contour path is not monotonous. When programming finishing allowance in Z the following sign rules have to be considered: Outside machining: a positive sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the positive X axis a negative sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the negative X axis Inside machining: a positive sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the negative X axis a negative sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the positive X axis In general, it is possible to combine freely the finishing allowances X, Z and B in the NC program.
Programming hints
When starting the computer no finishing allowance is active. If G57 is programmed the finishing allowance remains active within the active NC programs until it is deactivated or G57 is re-programmed with other values.
MTS GmbH 1998
73
G57
table of programming for finishing allowances NC block No ... NC block starting situation
Finishing Allowance
valid finishing allowance
allowance X = 0 allowance Z = 0 allowance B = 0 allowance X = 2 allowance Z = 2 allowance B = 0 allowance X = 4 allowance Z = 2 allowance B = 0 allowance X = 0 allowance Z = 0 allowance B = 0 allowance X = 1 allowance Z = 0 allowance B = 1.5
N080
G57 X+2 Z+2
N170
G57 X+4
N245
G57 X+0 Z+0
N360
G57 B+1.5 X+1
Outside machining a) finishing allowance in X and Z of a monotonously ascending contour b) equidistant finishing allowance of a non monotonous contour
Inside machining a) finishing allowance in X and Z of a monotonously descending contour b) equidistant finishing allowance of a non monotonous contour
74
G75
Straight Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contour
Programming Example: N145 G00 X+105 Z+3 N150 G75 X+30 Z-55 I+1 K+0.5 D+6 H+25 W+1 Diagram G75.1
Degression of infeed and minimum cutting depth Example: R = 0.5 mm V = 2.5 mm
In this example the programmed cutting depth is D = 4 mm . After each cutting pass the infeed is reduced by the value R (0.5 mm). At address V , 2.5 mm is determined as the minimum value to which the cutting depth may be reduced. All remaining passes will be executed at this value once it has been reached. Diagram G75.2
Optimizing the remaining cuts Example: D = 4 mm L = 50
In this example, with a depth of cut D = 4 mm programmed, the remaining stock to be removed is 5 mm. Removing this stock would normally require two passes. The optimizing function serves to increase the depth of cut by L = 50 (50%) to a maximum of 6 mm. In this way one of the passes is dispensed with. Diagram G75.3
76
Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour
G75
5.5 Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G75

Function The command G75 serves to program a straight (lengthwise) roughing cycle for rectangular workpiece contours. This cycle is applicable to internal as well as to external machining.
NC Block
G75 X... Z... S.../D... [I...] [K...] [H...W...] [R...V...] [L...]
Addresses
X, Z S D
Endpoint coordinates Number of cutting passes - D may be programmed as an alternative. After each pass the tool is adjusted in direction X by the value programmed at D - S can be programmed as an alternative. When the cycle is executed the actual depth of cut may be different from the programmed value D, depending on the optional programming of addresses R, V and L. (see optional programming of addresses R, V and L) Finishing allowances in X (as related to the radius) and Z
Optional Addresses
I, K
H, W Chip-breaking (see Straight Roughing Cycle G65) Address H determines the distance traveled by the tool along the Z-axis before the cut is interrupted, while address W determines the distance by which the tool moves back after the interruption. The addresses W and H must always be programmed as a combination. R Degression of cutting depth (see Diagram G75.2) At R the value by which the infeed D is to be reduced with each pass is programmed. If R is programmed D and V must be programmed as well. Minimum cutting depth (see Diagram G75.2) At address V the minimum cutting depth is determined. In this way the cutting depth D, while reduced by the degression, will not be less than value V. If V is programmed D and R must be programmed as well. Optimizing the remaining cuts (see Diagram G75.3) At address L an integral percentage (between 1 and 100) of the cutting depth D is programmed. The control system will compute the depth of cut to remove the remaining stock, increasing the infeed by a maximum of the percentage programmed at L, in order to dispense with one cutting pass in feeding down to the programmed finish.
Explanation
When the cycle is invoked, the starting point is determined by the position of the tool. Accounting for the finishing allowances I and K a right-angled contour will be turned by removing the stock of material represented by the rectangular square in Diagram G75.2).The number of passes required can either be programmed at address S or may be computed by the NC system after the infeed D and after, the optional addresses R, V and L have been specified. The feedrate and the cutting speed must have been programmed in a preceding NC block. As the first infeed is executed from the initial tool position (the starting point), when the cycle is invoked the tool must be positioned in direction X either above (outside) the external diameter of the blank or below (inside) the internal diameter, depending on whether external or internal machining is required.
Programming Hints
MTS GmbH 1998
77
G76
Cross Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contour
Programming Example: N145 G00 X+105 Z+3 N150 G76 X+30 Z-40 I+1 K+0.5 D+4 H+15 W+1
Diagram G76.1 Degression and minimum cutting depth Example: R = 1 mm V = 3 mm
In this example the programmed cutting depth is D = 6 mm . After each cutting pass the infeed is reduced by the value R (1 mm). At address V , 3 mm is determined as the minimum value to which the cutting depth may be reduced, so that all remaining passes will be executed at this value once it has been reached.
Diagram G76.2
Optimizing the remaining cuts Example: D = 4 mm L = 50
In this example, with a programmed cutting depth of D = 4 mm, the remaining stock to be removed amounts to 5.5 mm. Removing this stock would normally require two passes. The optimizing function serves to increase the depth of cut by L = 50 (50%) to a maximum of 6 mm. In this way one of the passes is dispensed with.
Diagram G76.3
78
Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour
G76
5.6 Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G76

Function The command G76 serves to program a cross (square) roughing cycle for rectangular workpiece contours. The cycle may be used in internal as well as external machining.
NC Block
G76 X... Z... S.../D... [I...] [K...] [H...W...] [R...V...] [L...]
Addresses
X, Z S D
End point coordinates Number of cutting passes - D may be programmed as an alternative. After each pass the tool is adjusted in direction Z by the value programmed at D (S may be programmed as an alternative.) During execution the actual depth of cut may be different from the programmed value D, depending on the optional programming of addresses R, V and L. (see optional programming of addresses R, V and L) Finishing allowances in X (as related to the radius) and Z
Optional Addresses
I, K
H, W Chip-breaking (see Cross Roughing Cycle G66) The address H determines the distance travelled by the tool along the X-axis before the cut is interrupted, the address W determines the distance by which the tool moves back after the interruption. The addresses W and H must always be programmed as a combination. R Degression of cutting depth (see Diagram G76.2) The value by which the infeed D is reduced with each pass is programmed at R. If R is programmed D and V must also be programmed. Minimum cutting depth (see Diagram G76.2) At address V the minimum cutting depth is determined. In this way the cutting depth D, while reduced by the degression will not be smaller than value V. If V is programmed D and R must also be programmed. Optimizing the remaining cuts (see Diagram G76.3) At address L an integral percentage (between 1 and 100) of the cutting depth D is programmed. The control system will compute the depth of cut to remove the remaining stock, increasing the infeed by a maximum of the percentage programmed at L, in order to dispense with one cutting pass when feeding down to the programmed finish.
Explanation
When the cycle is invoked, the starting point is determined by the initial position of the tool. Accounting for the finishing allowances I and K a right-angled contour will be turned by removing the stock of material represented by the rectangular square in Diagram G76.2).The number of passes required can either be programmed at address S or may be computed by the NC system after the infeed D and if desired, after the optional addresses R, V and L have been specified. The feedrate and the cutting speed must have been programmed in a preceding NC block. As the first infeed is executed from the initial tool position (the starting point), when the cycle is invoked the tool must be positioned in the direction X, either above (outside) the external diameter of the blank or below (inside) the internal diameter, depending on whether external or internal machining is required.
Programming Hints
MTS GmbH 1998
79
G78
Clearance Cutting Cycle
Clearance Cut Type E
Programming Example: N110 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+01 O306
Diagram G78.1
Clearance Cut Type F
Programming Example: N170 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+02 O306
Diagram G78.2
80
G78
5.7 Clearance Cutting Cycle: G78 (in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F)
Function The G78 command serves to program clearance cutting cycles in compliance with the German standard DIN 509 type E or type F, as well as thread undercuts according to DIN 76 . The type of cut to be executed is determined by the control system, depending on which addresses have been programmed. The only difference in geometry between clearance cuts type E and F is determined by parameter t2 (see Diagrams G78.1 and G78.2). With specific address combinations the dimensions of the clearance cut can be programmed as desired (see table below). Cross Reference Conversely, a clearance cut programmed as a G85 cycle depends on the workpiece diameter.
NC Block
G78 X...
X Z L
Z...
L...
O...
[D...]
[I...]
Addresses
X-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed. Z-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed. The clearance cut is determined by the DIN parameter L : L01: clearance cut according to DIN 509 type E L02: clearance cut according to DIN 509 type F
At address O the clearance cut geometry is programmed (see table below). The value f defines the length, r defines the radii, t1 defines the depth and t2 (with type F only) defines the machining allowance of the clearance cut: f O101 O102 O204 O206 O306 O410 O210 O316 O425 O540 0.5 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 4.0 2.5 4.0 5.0 7.0 r 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 t1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t2 (with type F only) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3
To the desired dimensions of the clearance cut, the applicable threedigit entry must be made at address O.
MTS GmbH 1998
81
G78
Clearance Cut Type F and Finishing Allowance D
Programming Example: N110 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+02 O306 D+0.2
Diagram G78.3 :
The clearance cut is shifted in the X and Z directions by the value programmed at D.
At the start of a clearance cutting cycle the tool must be positioned within the area included by an angle of 45 degrees to the following contour.
Diagram G78.4 :
Tool position at the start of a clearance cutting cycle
If the programmed clearance cut is to be executed with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation, the minimum angle of the approach line to the subsequent bevelled contour must be 180 degrees. Diagram G78.5: Approach angle with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation.
82
G78
D Machining allowance The rounded transitions of the clearance cut are shifted in the directions X and Z by the value programmed at D (see Diagram G78.3). Grinding allowance The grinding allowance must be accounted for when the starting point is programmed.
Optional Addresses
Programming Hints
To ensure that the clearance cutting cycle is executed according to the programmed dimensions it is advisable to ensure that the starting point has been correctly programmed (see diagrams G78.4 and G78.5). Due to the relatively small dimensions concerned we also recommend the programming of tool nose compensation (see G41/G42). The control system will automatically execute an internal clearance cut, accounting for the tooling quadrant (see Compensation Values).
MTS GmbH 1998
83
G78
Thread Undercut
Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76
Programming Example: N170 G78 X+40 Z-40 I+2 K+8
Diagram G78.6
84
Thread Undercut
G78
5.8 Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 76

Function If the G78 command and its addresses X, Z, I and K are programmed, a thread undercut in compliance with DIN 76 will be executed.
NC Block
G78 X... Z... I... K...

X Z I K X-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed Z-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed Depth of cut relative to the radius Length of the clearance cut. Only positive values programmed at K are valid.
Addresses
Programming Hints
Please note that due to the geometry of a clearance cut, the value determining the length K must be at least 2,34 times the value I determining the depth. The radius r is computed by the control system, according to the cutting depth I. The radius will always be at a ratio of 0.6 of the programmed depth.
Cross Reference
The G78 cycle with its addresses X, Z, I and K is identical to the thread undercut G85 with the same addresses.
MTS GmbH 1998
85
G79
Programming Example: N145 G00 X+42 Z-7 N150 G79 X+34 Z-20 A+1 W+1 I+3 K+1.5 D+7 J+2
Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides
Diagram G79.1 :
Recessing cycle with chamfers at the upper edges of the recess and roundings at the bottom.
Programming Example: N145 G00 X+42 Z-7 N150 G79 X+34 Z-20 H+1 R+1 I+3 K+1 D+7 J+2 O130 Q130
Diagram G79.2 :
Recessing cycle with bevelled sides
The finishing allowance programmed for the first cutting pass is too small: the resulting recess (dashed line) collides with the programmed final contour (bottom chamfers).
Diagram G79.3 :
Result of a insufficient finishing allowance

86
Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides
G79
5.9 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides G79
Function The G79 cycle determines a recessing cut, including chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides. Programming of the addresses X and Z is mandantory; further addresses are optional.
NC Block
G79 X... Z...
[A.../H...] [K...]
[R.../W...] [D...] [J...] [O...] [Q...]
[I...]
Addresses X, Z
If D > 0 : coordinates of the left corner point of the recess. If D < 0 : coordinates of the right corner point of the recess. If D is not programmed, the width of recess will be determined by the tool width specified in the current compensation value register.
Optional Addresses
A H R W I K D
Chamfer at the upper edge of recess, length related to the Z-coordinate. Radius of rounding at the upper edge of the recess. Chamfer at the bottom edge, length related to the Z-coordinate. Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of the recess. Finishing allowance in the direction X, as related to the diameter. Allowance relative to the Z-coordinate. Width of recess: if D+ is programmed, the recess is executed to the right of the corner point X,Z. if D- is programmed, the recess is executed to the left of the corner point X,Z. Distance of the tool clearance plane in X from the workpiece before invocation of the cycle invocation. The value programmed at J relates to the diameter. Recess side angle to the positive X-axis at the corner point X,Z. (see Diagram G79.2). The angle, specified in tenths of a degree, must not exceed 45. When no bevel is programmed, the address value will be set to O=0 . Recess side angle to the positive X-axis at the side opposite to the corner point X,Z. (see Diagram G79.2). The angle, specified in tenths of a degree, must not exceed 45. When no bevel is programmed, the address value will be set to Q=0 .
Explanation
Starting from the actual tool position at cycle invocation (starting point), the rectangular recess (as indicated by the dashed lines in Diagram G79.2) is cut in the first pass, accounting for the programmed finishing allowances I and K. In the second pass the recess is cut to the finished size as programmmed at X/Z and D, including the execution of eventual chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides. If one of addresses A, H, R, W, O, or Q is programmed, also the finishing allowances I and K must also be programmed. In so doing the values programmed at I and K must be at least equal to the specified chamfer length or rounding radius, to avoid gouging the finished contour (see Diagram G79.3).
Programming Hints
MTS GmbH 1998
87
G81
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour
5.10 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour G81

The parameters of the cycle G81 have been extended compared to version 5.x. Additionally optional addresses E, A, O and Q have been included. Function With the command G81 a cycle to machine straight roughing (parallel to Z axis) can be programmed with any connecting contour. The cycle can be used for inside as well as for outside machining.
NC-Command Addresses
G81 I... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]
I Infeed (referring to the radius) The infeed I indicates the infeed movement value to be taken after each cut in direction X. When processing cycles the infeed can deviate from the programmed value depending on the optional addresses R, V and L. Coordinates of the contour starting point If these coordinates are not being programmed the end point of the first infeed commands after the cycle call (G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72, G72) is considered as the contour starting point. Degression of cutting depth The address R is for programming the infeed value I by which the infeed movement is to be reduced after each cut. If R is programmed, V has to be programmed as well. Minimum infeed The address V is for programming the minimum infeed value. If V has been programmed it means that the Degression of cutting depth R reduces the infeed value I at maximum up to the value V. If V has been programmed R has to be programmed as well. Chip breaking, infeed interruption in Z direction H gives the length of the line in direction Z after which the infeed movement is interrupted for chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together. Chip breaking, return path of the tool in direction Z W specifies the path the tool returns after chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together. Final roughing optimizing The address L is for programming the non-fraction percentage value (1 <= L =< 100) of the infeed I. The control increases then the last roughing level at maximum by the percentage programmed under L if this enables to turn the work part to the next level (Z axis-parallel contour) in one machining run. Recessing angle of the tool If no recessing angle has been programmed the control calculates its value based on the values of correction value storage of the currently selected tool. Withdrawal angle of the tool If no withdrawal angle has been programmed the control calculates its value based on the values of the correction value storage of the currently selected tool.
Optional Addresses
X, Z
F
88
Please note: It is possible that the contour to be machined with the cycle in question is eventually modified by the programming of the angles E and A. In such a case there might be a remaining chip left over. Therefore, the system displays the following warning: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool.
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour O Deactivating path optimizing O1
G81
As a standard function the cycle G81 optimizes travel paths of the tool with reference to the actual work part. Thus so-called empty moves are eliminated. This standard function can be switched off by entering O1; this means no travel path optimizing is carried out.
Deactivating contour strings-up after each roughing level Q1
Programming hints
When processing the cycle G81 the tool follows the contour path up to the preceding roughing level as a standard. This function can be switched off by setting Q1. The tool is then withdrawn from the roughing level immediately after completing the contour without contour follow-up. The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cycle call G81 or in the first NC block with path command. In the subsequent NC blocks the path of the complete contour is being described. Machining takes place on this contour. The contour description is completed with command G80, and at the same time the machining of the cycle is started. By setting a limiting window it is possible to fade out part of the contour for machining. Immediately after the cycle G81 has been programmed the simulator is able to use a previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G81, as an alternative to the description of the contour. This is possible with the command G51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary to program the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window (also see cycle G80). The cycle G81 then works out exactly those parts of the programmed nominal contour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it may occur that the nominal contour is split into several contour sections. The cycle then processes those contour sections which can be machined with the selected tool. When declining contour sections or undercuts with a small finishing allowance are being machined it is necessary to select tool nose compensation. In such a case G41 or G42 needs to be called with the cycle G81 immediately after the NC block, i.e. prior to programming the contour. The tool nose compensation is to be switched off after contour description, prior to the cycle call G81. The cycle G81 uses the work part contour for the definition of the cutting radius compensation by calculating the mathematical equidistant in distance of the cutting radius of the tool applied. The equidistant is then used for the definition of the travel paths of the tool. This procedure corresponds to a free preview when calculating the cutting radius compensation. A finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed with command G57. If the diameter of the current tool for outside machining is larger or for inside machining smaller than the diameter of the final point of the programmed contour at the moment the cycle G81 is being called, the contour is extended to the outside or to the inside respectively up to the diameter of the current tool position.
Programming example Programming of a nominal contour G51 and a limiting window G80 for straight roughing with G81
... N010 G51 X+0 Z+0 O+1 N011 G71 X+35 Z+0 N012 ... ... ... description of the nominal contour ... ... N050 G50 N051 G81 I+4 N052 G80 X+5 Z-80...
MTS GmbH 1998
89
G81
Straight roughing cycle with any contour (outside machining)
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed starting point of the contour = contour points (description of the contour)
Programming example Straight roughing cycle for any contour (outside machining)
... N145 G00 X+50 Z+5 N150 G81 X+18 Z+3 I+7 N155 G42 N160 ... ... ... description of the contour ... ... N215 G40 N220 G80 ... = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed contour starting point = contour points (description of the contour)
Straight roughing cycle for any contour (inside machining)
Programming example Straight roughing cycle for any contour (inside machining)
... N345 G00 X+8 Z+6 N350 G81 X+76 Z+4 I+7 N355 G41 N360 ... ... ... description of the contour ... ... N415 G40 N420 G80 ...
90
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour Infeed interruption for chip breaking of straight roughing cycle.
G81
H specifies for chip breaking the string after which the infeed is interrupted in each case. W specifies the string the tool is withdrawn before starting to machine again the string specified under H. Final roughing optimizing a) Cutting division without final cutting optimizing
b) Cutting division with final roughing optimizing
= final roughing optimized roughing level
Programming example Final roughing optimizing
Infeed I=4 mm Final roughing optimizing L=25% Final roughing optimizing for cycle G81 considers for optimizing Z- parallel elements of a programmed contour string. Without final roughing optimizing (a) the cycle is run 5 times for the contour. Using the final roughing optimizing, however, the infeed is increased by 25 % up to maximum 5 mm, if this possible to machine in this way the following Z-parallel contour element. In the following example consequently the cuts 1 and 4 are being optimized (b). Herewith one machining run less is required.
MTS GmbH 1998
91
G81
Recessing angle E for outside machining a) recessing angle E is larger than the angle of the descending contour
b) recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the descending contour
= programmed contour = maximum contour possible to realize = remaining final roughing volume
The recessing angle E plays an important role for the programming of the descending contour. Its value depends on the type of the tool holder applied, and it is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool. When using the command G81, E can be programmed separately as well. In this case the cycle uses the value E stored under G81 instead of the respective value stored in the correction value register of the tool. To be able to generate a descending contour with a tool the recessing angle E has to be larger than the angle of the descending contour (a). If the recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the descending contour the programmed contour cannot be machined with the selected tool.(b). When processing the cycle only the contour which at maximum can be machined with the current tool is realized. Hereby a final roughing volume remains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool. Recessing angle for inside machining a) recessing angle E is larger than the angle of the falling contour
92
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour b) recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the descending contour
G81
= programmed contour = maximum contour to be realized = remaining final roughing volume
Withdrawal angle for outside machining a) withdrawal angle A is larger than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts b) withdrawal angle A is smaller than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts = programmed contour = maximum contour to be generated = remaining final roughing volume
The withdrawal angle A plays an important role for the programming of the ascending contour with undercuts. It depends on the type of the currently applied tool holder and is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool. When using the command G81 it is possible to program A separately as well. The cycle then uses the value A programmed under G81 instead of the value stored in the correction value register of the tool To be able to generate an ascending contour with a tool the withdrawal angle A has to be larger than the angle of the ascending contour (a). If the descending angle A is smaller than the angle of the ascending contour with undercuts the programmed contour cannot be machined with the selected tool (b). Therefore, when processing the cycle only the maximum possible contour is realized. This means that a final roughing volume remains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool.
MTS GmbH 1998
93
G81
a) withdrawal angle A is larger than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts
b) withdrawal angle A is smaller than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts
= programmed contour = maximum contour possible to realize = remaining final roughing volume
Programming example Recessing and withdrawal angle for straight roughing cycle G81
... N25 G00 X+90 Z+10 N30 G57 +1 N35 G81 X+20 Z+2 I+5 E+45 A+45 N40 G42 N45 G01 Z+0 ... N90 G40 N95 G80 In the first machining phase of this example the programmed contour is roughed with a corner turning tool (reversible tips Type S, end tool entering angle 45) in depth of 1 mm (see the next figure).
94
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour Using recessing and withdrawal angle for the programming of a straight roughing cycle G81 (roughing of the contour)
G81
During interactive programming the CNC simulator indicates that the programmed contour cannot be machined completely with this tool. In the graphic representation the actually roughed area is highlighted in color. In the second machining phase the contour is roughed with a further corner turning tool. Here as well, the CNC simulator highlights in color the area which has actually been roughed (see the next figure). Like for roughing the cycle optimizes the travel paths automatically., so that empty moves are avoided. Using recessing and withdrawal angle for programming a straight roughing cycle G81 (finishing of contour)
MTS GmbH 1998
95
G81
Travel path optimizing for straight roughing cycle G81 a) G81 with travel path optimizing (standard)
= premachined contour = cut-out material section area
If optimizing is activated the cycle calculates the diameter of the outer material edge in the roughing area and starts the infeed I from this outer edge. The roughing paths including their dimensions are hereby placed on the material section area to be roughed and all travel paths outside of this area are optimized. This travel path optimizing which is activated as a standard function enables to eliminate the so-called empty moves when using the straight roughing cycle G81. b) G81 without travel path optimizing
= Area of the so-called empty moves created through deactivated travel path optimizing (optional address O1) = cut-out material section area = premachined contour
If travel path optimizing has been deactivated the first infeed I starts from the current tool position or from the outer edge of limiting window stored under G80.
96
Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour Contour sequences for straight roughing cycle G81 a) G81 without contour sequences after each roughing level
G81
if contour sequence function (optional address Q1) is deactivated the corners remain unfinished after each roughing level
b) G81 with contour sequences after each roughing level (standard)
Due to activated contour sequences after each roughing level as a standard setting the edges created by straight roughing cycle G81 are avoided.
MTS GmbH 1998
97
G82
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour
5.11 Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour G82

The parameters of the cycle G82 have been extended compared with the version 5.x. Furthermore, the addresses E, A, O and Q have been added as well. Function With the command G82 the cycle for roughing in plane direction (parallel to X axis) is programmed with any connecting contour. G82 can be used for both inside and outside machining.
NC-Command Addresses
G82 K... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]
K Infeed K indicates the infeed value in Z direction after each cut.
Optional Addresses
When processing the cycle the infeed value can deviate from the programmed values, because its value depends on the address values C, V and L.. X, Z Coordinates of the contour starting point If these coordinates have not been programmed the end point of the first travel command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72, G72) after the cycle call becomes the contour starting point. R Degression of cutting depth The decrease value for the infeed K after each cut is stored under the address C. Minimum infeed The minimum infeed value is stored under the address V. The programmed value V specifies the minimum value to which infeed value K is reduced by the decrease value C. If V has been programmed, C has to be programmed as well. Chip breaking, infeed interruption in X direction H specifies the length of the string in X direction after which the infeed is interrupted for chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together. Chip breaking, tool returns in X direction W specifies the string the tool returns after chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together. Final roughing optimizing A non-fraction percentage (1 <= L <= 100) of the infeed K is programmed under L. This value is used by the control to increase the infeed for the last roughing level at maximum by the percentage stored under L in case it is possible in this way to machine the work part in one machining run to the next machining level (contour path parallel to X axis). Recessing angle of the auxiliary cutting edge of the tool If no recessing angle has been programmed the control calculates its value based on the entries in the correction value register of the currently selected tool.. Withdrawal angle of the main cutting edge of the tool If no withdrawal angle has been programmed the control calculates its value based on the entries in the correction value register of the currently selected tool.
F
98
Please note: The contour string processed by the cycle is modified by the programming of the angle E and A. As in such a case eventually a residual roughing remains the following warning might be displayed: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool.
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour O
G82
Deactivating travel movement optimizing O1 In general, the cycle G82 optimizes the travel path of the tool with reference to the work part. This function can be switched off by setting O1. i. e. no travel path optimizing takes place. Deactivating contour strings after each roughing level Q1 When processing the cycle G82 the tool follows, as a standard, the contour string up to the preceding roughing level. This function can be switched off by setting Q1. The tool is then withdrawn from the roughing level immediately after completing the contour without following the contour.
Programming hints
The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cycle call G82 or in the first NC block of the travel command. The subsequent NC blocks describe the path of the full contour to be machined. The command G80 completes the contour description and also starts the processing of the cycle. With G80 it is possible to exclude from machining part of the contour by switching it off with the limiting window. Immediately after the cycle G82 has been programmed the simulator is able to use a previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G82, as an alternative to the description of the contour. This can be done with the command G51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary to program the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window (also see cycle G80). The cycle G82 then processes only those parts of the programmed nominal contour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it might occur that the nominal contour is split into several contour sections by the limiting window. The cycle consequently generates only those contour sections which can be machined with the selected tool. If machining takes place with tool nose compensation G41 or G42 have to be called immediately after the NC block with the cycle G82, i. e. prior to the programming of the contour. The selection of the tool nose compensation is to be placed after the contour description and prior to the cycle call G80. Finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed with the command G57. If the diameter of the current tool position is in case of outside machining larger or in case of inside machining smaller than the diameter of the end point of the programmed contour at the moment the cycle G82 is being called, then the end point will be extended parallel to the axis respectively either to the outside or inside up to the diameter of the current tool position.
MTS GmbH 1998
99
G82
Straight roughing cycle with any contour (outside machining)
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed contour starting point = contour points (description of the contour)
Programming example Straight roughing cycle with any contour (outside machining)
... N045 G00 X+75 Z+2 N050 G82 X+72 Z-35 K+5 N055 G41 N060 ... ... ... description of the contour ... ... N115 G40 N120 G80 ... = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed contour starting point = contour points (description of the contour)
Plane roughing cycle with any contour (inside machining)
Programming example Plane roughing cycle for any contour (inside machining)
... N345 G00 X+10 Z+5 N350 G82 X+15 Z-50 K+7 N355 G42 N360 ... ... ... description of the contour ... ... N415 G40 N420 G80 ...
100
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour Infeed interruption for chip breaking in plane roughing
G82
For chip breaking H specifies the path after which the infeed is interrupted in each case. W specifies the path the tool returns before starting a new path H as an infeed. Final roughing optimizing a) cutting division without final roughing optimizing = Residual infeed of the last machining run = programmed contour
b) cutting division with final roughing optimizing
= first and last infeed after final roughing optimizing = programmed contour
Recessing angle for machining outside a) the recessing angle A is larger than the angle of the descending contour with under-cuts
= machining direction
MTS GmbH 1998
101
G82
b) the recessing angle A is smaller than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts: a residual chip remains
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour = programmed contour = maximum possible contour which can be generated = remaining chip rest volume = machining direction
The recessing angle A is an important entity for the programming of descending contours. It is directly related to the type of the tool holder applied and is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool. When using the command G82 it is possible to program E separately. In this case the cycle then uses the value A programmed in G82 instead of the, by 0,5 corrected, value from the correction value register of the tool. To be able to create a descending contour with a tool the recessing angle A needs to be larger than the angle of the descending contour (a). If the recessing angle A is smaller than the angle of the descending contour the programmed contour cannot be realized with the selected tool (b). In this case, when working out the cycle, only the maximum contour possible to be machined with the selected tool is therefore realized. Hereby a residual cutting volume remains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool. Recessing angle for inside machining a) recessing angle A is larger than the angle of the descending contour with under-cuts = machining direction
b) recessing angle A is smaller than the angle of the descending contour with undercuts: a residual chip remains
= programmed contour = maximum contour possible to realize = remaining rest cutting volume = machining direction
102
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour Withdrawal angle for outside machining a) withdrawal angle E is larger than the angle of the descending contour
G82
= machining direction
b) withdrawal angle E is smaller than the angle of the descending angle with undercuts: a residual chip remains
The withdrawal angle E is an important entity for the programming of ascending contours with undercuts. It is directly connected with the type of the tool applied and it is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool. When using the command G82 it is possible to program E separately. In this case the cycle then uses the value A programmed in G82 instead of the by 0,5 corrected value from the correction value register of the tool. To be able to realize an ascending contour with a tool the withdrawal angle A needs to be larger than the angle of the ascending contour (a). If the recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the ascending contour with undercuts the programmed contour cannot be realized with the selected tool (b). In this case, when working out the cycle, only the maximum contour possible to be machined with the selected tool is therefore realized. Hereby a rest cutting volume remains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool.
MTS GmbH 1998
103
G82
Withdrawal angle for inside machining a) withdrawal angle E is larger than the angle of the descending contour
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour = machining direction
b) withdrawal angle E is smaller than the angle of the descending contour: a residual chip remains
Optimizing travel path in plane roughing cycle G82 of a premachined work part a) G82 with travel path optimizing (standard)
= premachined contour = the maximum contour machinable with the current tool = cut-out material section area If travel path optimizing has been activated the cycle calculates the Z coordinate of the outer material edge in the roughing area and starts the infeed I from this outer edge. The roughing paths including their dimensions are hereby placed on the material section area to be roughed and all travel paths outside of this area are optimized. This travel path optimizing, which is activated as a standard function, enables to eliminate the so-called empty moves when using the plane roughing cycle G82.
104
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour b) G82 without travel path optimizing
G82
= Area of so-called empty moves created by deactivated travel path optimizing (optional address O1) = premachined contour = the maximum contour machinable with the current tool = cut-out material section area If travel path optimizing has been deactivated the first infeed I starts from the current tool position or from the outer edge of the limiting window stored under G80. Contour sequences of plane roughing cycle G82 a) G82 without contour sequences after each roughing step
= if contour sequence (optional address Q1) is not activated the corners remain unfinished after each roughing step
MTS GmbH 1998
105
G82
b) G82 with contour sequences after each roughing step (standard)
Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour
Due to activated contour sequences after each roughing step as a standard setting of the plane roughing cycle G82 unfinished corners are avoided.
106
Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle)
G80
5.12 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80

Function The command G80 executes the most recently programmed cycle. When using G80 it is possible to specify an optional rectangle limiting window for the cycles G81, G82 and G87. By placing the limiting window, part of the contour area programmed after the cycle call G81, G82 or G87 can be faded out. If no contour was programmed between the cycle call (G81, G82 or G87) in that case the contour to be machined is faded out in the window from the full work part contour which was programmed with G51. If no contour was programmed an error message is displayed. When placing a limiting window the window edge has to be placed in the infeed direction in front of the material edge or exactly on the material edge. If this is not the case, the control would try to feed in into the material and would so cause a collision. NC-Command Optional Addresses
G80 [X... Z...] [I... K...]

X, Z I, K Coordinates of the first corner point of the limiting window If X and Z have not been programmed no limiting window can be used. Coordinates of the second corner point of the limiting window If I and K have not been programmed the control automatically takes the current tool position as the second corner point of the limiting window when programming X and Z. Please, note that the coordinate X has to be programmed as a diameter, the coordinate I, however, as a radius.
F
Programming a limiting window for cycle processing
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = first corner point of the limiting window = second corner point of the limiting window = material to be cut off = contour of the finished part programmed with G51
MTS GmbH 1998
107
G80
Programming example Programming limiting window for cycle processing ... N345 G00 X+100 Z+5 N350 G81 I+4 N355 G42 N360 ... ... ... contour description ... ... N415 G40 N420 G80 X+40 Z-75 I+50 K-42 ...
Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle)
The following figures demonstrate the two alternative ways to use the limiting window. Hereby the full contour was programmed as a nominal contour using the G51 command. The called straight roughing cycle G81 optimizes the travel paths to avoid so-called empty moves. Calling straight roughing cycle G81 with the NC command G80 Alternative 1: G80 X+5 Z-75
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = second corner point of the limiting window = first corner point of the limiting window = limiting window = material to be cut off = full contour programmed with G51 (nominal contour)
108
Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) Calling straight roughing cycle G81 with the NC command G80, after having prorogued the work part already Alternative 2: G80 X+40 Z-75 I+50 K-42
G80
= = = = = =
starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) first corner point of the limiting window second corner point of the limiting window limiting window material to be cut off full contour programmed with G51 (nominal contour)
MTS GmbH 1998
109
G83
Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle
Programming Example: N165 G00 X+55 Z+21 N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6 N175 G42 N180 (Contour description)
N235 G40 N240 G80 Contouring Cycle G83
Diagram G83.1:
In this example, depending on the position of the starting point relative to the first contour point, programming of infeed K will reduce the number of cutting passes required. Diagram G83.2:
Given the same values at I and K but with a different starting point, the infeed distance I is greater and consequently results in a reduction of cutting passes.
If addresses I and K are programmed, the control system will select an infeed which results in a reduction of cutting passes.
Pattern of recesses at a constant distance Programming Example: N295 G00 X+052.100 Z-043.600 N300 G83 X+052.100 Z-063.600 K+010 N305 G79 X+047 Z-063.600 I+001 K+001 A+001 W+001 O110 Q110 N310 G80 Diagram G83.3 : Recessing cycle G79 as part of the contouring cycle G83
110
Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle
G83
5.13 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle G83

Function Motion commands or further cycles programmed between the G83 command and the G80 command (which terminates the cycle) will be multiply executed, depending on the programmed infeed. In this way the G83 command can be employed to effect a contouring cycle, e.g. in the machining of pre-fabricated blanks or with internal machining. A sequence of recesses at constant distances can also be executed.
NC Block Addresses
G83 X...
X Z I K
Z...
I...
K...
X-coordinate of the first point of the contour, related to the diameter Z-coordinate of the first point of the contour Infeed in X, as related to the radius Infeed in Z
Explanation
With contouring the infeed motion starts at the initial tool position (starting position) and proceeds to the first (starting) point of the contour, as programmed in the G83 NC block. The depth of cut in direction X and Z is programmed at the address I or K. If both addresses are programmed, the control system will execute that cutting depth which results in the smallest number of passes - which of the addresses is selected will depend on the starting position of the tool as related to the programmed start of the contour (see Diagram G83.2). Following the G83 command the appropriate motion commands (contour description) or cycles initiates must be programmed. G80 completes the contour description and starts the cycle execution.
Example
Recessing Cycle (G79): recesses cuts at a constant distance (see Diagram G83.3): N295 G00 X+052.100 Z-043.600 N300 G83 X+052.100 Z-063.600 K+010 N305 G79 X+047 Z-063.600 I+001 K+001 A+001 W+001 O110 Q110 N310 G80 After each cutting pass the tool is adjusted in direction Z by K=10 (NC Block N300), relative to the programmed start of the contour. After each feed adjustment the recessing cycle G79 is executed, resulting in two recesses at a distance of 10 mm.
Programming Hints
F
MTS GmbH 1998
If tool nose compensation is to be selected during machining, G42 or G41 must be invoked immediately after the cycle command G83 and prior to the travel commands. Tool nose compensation must be canceled (by G40) before the cycle is terminated (by G80). With multipass cycles it is advisable to program the tool path limitation G36. Particularly when internal cuts are executed, this range limitation is indispensable. See next page for an explanation of the G36 command.
111
G36
Programming Example: N165 G00 X+55 Z+21 N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6 N175 G42 N180 (Contour Description)
N235 G40 N240 G80 Contouring Cycle G83 without Travel Range Limitation
Diagram G36.1:
Programming Example: N165 G00 X+55 Z+21 N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6 N175 G36 N180 G42 N185 (Contour Description)
N240 G40 N245 G80 Contouring Cycle G83 with Travel Range Limitation
Diagram G36.2
Programming Example: N110 G83 X+45 Z+21 I+3.2 N115 G36 N120 G36 N125 G41 N130 (Contour Description)
112
N195 G40 N200 G80 Travel Range Limitation with Internal Machining
Diagram G36.3
G36
5.14 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles G36

Function The G36 command can be used to limit the tool path range whenever the contouring cycle G83 or other multipass cycles are programmed.
NC Block
G36
The contouring cycle G83 effects the execution of multiple cutting passes along the programmed contour, the number of passes being dependent of the programmed depth of cut. As shown in Diagram G36.1, part of the tool motion is outside the workpiece contour. The G36 command limits the range of tool motions, in order to reduce the machining time (see Diagram G36.2). With relief cuts, however, this may result in collisions when the tool plunge is too deep. Travel range limitation is of special importance when internal contouring is programmed, because travelling along the complete contour would result in a collision (see Diagram G36.3). The G36 command limits the travel range to the quadrant opposite the tool tip. The actual path limitation is dependent on the programmed start of the contour: when the tool position is higher than the start of the contour, no tool motions above the programmed X-coordinate will be executed (Diagram G36.2). when the tool position is lower than the start of the contour, no tool motions below the programmed X-coordinate will be executed (Diagram G36.3).
Explanation
Programming Hints
The G36 command must be programmed after the NC block invocating the G83 cycle. If a finishing allowance G57 is programmed before the start of the cycle, the programmed value must be taken into account when determining the starting position of the tool.
MTS GmbH 1998
113
G84
Deep Drilling Cycle
Programming Example: N135 G01 X+0 Z+10 N140 G84 Z-130 A+0.5 B+1 D+15 K+50
Diagram G84.1
114
Deep Drilling Cycle
G84
5.15 Deep Drilling Cycle G84

Function The G84 command serves to execute the drilling of a hole by a number of repeated cutting operations.
NC Block
G84 Z...
Z A B D
A...
B...
D...
K...
Addresses
Z-coordinate of the end point. Dwell time (sec) after tool retraction for chip-removal Dwell time (sec) for chip-breaking Degression: The drilling depth K is reduced after each drilling pass by the value programmed at D. It may not, however, fall short of D Drilling depth of the first pass.
K Explanation
The G84 command defines a deep drilling cycle. Example (see Diagram G84.1): In the given example the total drilling depth, programmed at Z, is Z = 130 mm. The depth of the first drilling is K = 50 mm. With each of the following passes the depth K is reduced by the value D = 15 mm (Degression). It may not, however, fall short of D. For chip-breaking the feed motion is interrupted after each drilling pass for the specified dwell time B; for chip-removal the tool is retracted to the clearance plane where it remains for the specified dwell time. The remaining depth to be drilled is computed by the control system and divided into two equal final cuts (in the given example 5 mm for each pass).
Programming Hints
The applicable feedrate and speed must be programmed in a preceding NC block.
MTS GmbH 1998
115
G85
Clearance Cut Type E
Programming Example: N210 G85 X+40 Z-40
Diagram G85.1
Clearance Cut Type F
Programming Example: N270 G85 X+40 Z-40 K+0
Diagram G85.2
116
G85
5.16 Clearance Cutting Cycle G85 in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F
Function The G85 command serves to program clearance cutting cycles in compliance with the German standard DIN 509 type E or type F, as well as thread undercuts according to DIN 76 . The type of cut to be executed is determined by the control system, depending on which addresses have been programmed. The only difference in geometry between clearance cuts types E and F of is determined by the parameter t2 (see Diagram G85.1 and G85.2). Dimension values such as length, depth, rounding radius and machining allowance will be dependent on the diameter of the workpiece at the programmed corner point (see the table below). Cross Reference If a clearance cut is programmed as a G78 cycle, the dimensions of the cut can be programmed at wiil, as long as they remain within a range of pre-defined dimensions.
NC Block
G85 X...
X Z
Z...
[K...]
[D...]
[I...]
Addresses
X-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed. Z-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed. Parameters of the clearance cut: If K is not programmed: Clearance cut according to DIN type E If K = 0 is programmed: Clearance cut according to DIN type F If K greater than 0 is programmed: Thread undercut / DIN 76 (see DIN)
Optional Addresses
Explanation
The clearance cut is executed at the programmed corner point, with the following dimensions, depending on the workpiece diameter: Diameter X less than 18 mm 18 to 80 mm more than 80 mm f r t1 t2 f 2 2,5 4 r 0,6 0,6 1 t1 0,35 0,35 0,45 t2 (type F only) 0,1 0,2 0,3
length radius depth machining allowance (with type F only)
MTS GmbH 1998
117
G85
Clearance Cut Type F and Finishing Allowance D
Programming Example: N210 G85 X+40 Z-40 D+0.2 K+0
Diagram G85.3 :
The clearance cut is shifted in directions X and Z by the value programmed at D.
At the start of a clearance cutting cycle the tool must be positioned within the area included by an angle of 45 degrees to the following contour.
Diagram G85.4 :
Tool position at the invocation of a clearance cutting cycle
If the programmed clearance cut is to be executed with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation, the minimum angle of the approach line to the subsequent bevelled contour must be 180 degrees.
Diagram G85.5 :
Approach angle with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation.
118
G85
D Machining allowance The rounded transitions of the clearance cut are shifted in the directions X and Z by the value programmed at D (see Diagram G85.3). Grinding allowance The grinding allowance must be accounted for when the starting point is programmed.
Optional Addresses
Programming Hints
To ensure thath the clearance cutting cycle is executed according to the programmed dimensions it is advisable to ensure that the starting point has been correctly programmed (see diagrams G78.4 and G78.5). Due to the relatively small dimensions concerned we also recommend the programming of the tool nose compensation (see G41/G42).
MTS GmbH 1998
119
G85
Thread Undercut
Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76

Programming Example: N270 G85 X+40 Z-40 I+2 K+8
Diagram G85.6
120
Thread Undercut
G85
5.17 Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76

Function If the G85 command and its addresses X, Z, I and K are programmed, a thread undercut in compliance with DIN 76 will be executed.
NC Block
G85 X... Z... I... K...

X Z I K X-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed Z-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed Depth of cut relative to the radius Length of the clearance cut. Only positive values programmed at K are valid.
Addresses
Programming Hints
Note: due to the geometry of a clearance cut, the value determining the length K must be at least 2,34 times the value I determining the depth. The radius r is computed by the control system, according to the cutting depth I. The radius will always be at a ratio of 0.6 of the programmed depth.
Cross Reference
The G85 cycle with its addresses X, Z, I and K is identical to the thread undercut G78, with the same addresses (see above p.87).
MTS GmbH 1998
121
G86
Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses
Programming Example: N250 G86 X+32 Z-20 K-8
Diagram G86.1 :
Recessing Cycle G86 without finishing allowance; the recess is executed to the left of the programmed corner point (K with a negative sign).
Programming Example: N195 G86 X+32 Z-20 B+1 I+0.7 K+8
Diagram G86.2 :
Recessing Cycle G86 with finishing allowance (dashed line) and radius of the roundings at the bottom edges. The chamfers at the top edges of the recess are dependent on the distance between the tool and the programmed corner point.
122
Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses
G86
5.18 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses G86

Function The cycle G86 serves to program rectangular recesses (sides parallel to the X-axis) with chamfers at the top edge and roundings at the bottom edge.
NC Block
G86 X...
X, Z K
Z...
K...
[B...]
[I...]
Addresses
If K > 0 : coordinates of the left corner point of the recess If K < 0 : coordinates of the right corner point of the recess. Width of recess: If K+ is programmed, the recess is executed to the right of the corner point X,Z. If K- is programmed, the recess is executed to the left of the corner point X,Z. If K is not programmed, a recess to the right of the programmed corner point is executed with the tool width as specified in the compensation value register.
Optional Addresses
B I
Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of the recess. If B is programmed, a finishing allowance must also be programmed at I. Finishing allowance related to the the diameter.
Explanation
Starting from the tool position at cycle invocation (starting point), in the first pass the rectangular recess (as indicated by the dashed lines in Diagram G86.2) is cut, taking into account the programmed finishing allowance I. In the second pass the recess is cut to the finished size as programmmed at X/Z and K, including eventual roundings. When a finishing allowance I has been programmed, the tool will feed 1.3 mm along both the left and right edges at an angle of 45. If the distance between the tool and the workpiece is less than 1.3 mm this operation results in chamfering of the upper edges of the recess. The absolute value programmed at address K must be greater or equal to the tool width stored in the compensation register. The G86 recessing cycle is different from the G79 recessing cycle (see p.89) with regard to geometry and optionally programmable addresses.
Programming Hints Cross Reference
MTS GmbH 1998
123
G87
Recessing Cycle for any Contour
5.19 Recessing Cycle for any Contour G87

Function With the command G87 a recessing cycle is programmed. With this command any contour can be roughed or finished. G87 can only be used with a recessing tool or a copying chisel with a round turnplate as a tool. Both straight and plane recessing can be made. If none of the optional switches O or Q is switched on when programming the recessing cycle G87 the following standard setting is valid for processing the cycle: Standard settings for processing the cycle G87 G87 is interpreted as a normal recessing cycle for machining straight recessing. The travel path movements of the tool are optimized with reference to the raw part to avoid so-called empty moves. The steps created after each infeed are machined immediately after the infeed. G87 generates a bidirectional recessing, beginning from the right to the left. This means that the recessing chisel changes the machining direction after each machining step. If the recessing contour has several valleys the machining is done step by step. This means that the control processes the recessing from one recessing level to the other, simultaneously in all valleys. Sharp valleys within the programmed recessing contour are machined exactly up to the depth where the width of the valley is identical with the width of the chisel. NC command Addresses
G87 I... [X... Z...] [L...] [H...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]

I Infeed The infeed I indicates the recessing chisel infeed value in X direction (with reference to the radius) after each cut. If a plane recessing is generated the infeed I indicates the recessing chisel infeed value in Z direction after each cut. When finishing a recess (switch O6) I indicates the distance by which the recessing tool is withdrawn above the local maxima of the recess when finishing.
Optional Addresses
X, Z
Coordinates of the contour starting point. If these coordinates have not been programmed the point of the first travel path command after the cycle call becomes the contour starting point.
Final roughing optimizing A non-fraction percentage (1 <= L <= 100) of the infeed K is programmed under L. This value is used by the control to increase the infeed for the last roughing level at maximum by the percentage stored under L in case it is possible in this way to machine the work part in one machining run up to the next machining level (contour path parallel to X axis).
Offsetting Under the address H a recessing offset can be programmed. The nonfraction percentage (1 <= H <= 100) indicates the recessing offset in per cent of the cutting width of the recessing chisel. If H is not programmed the system works with a standard offset default of 50 %. Correspondingly there is overlapping with the value of 100-H in per cent of the cutting width of the tool.
Dwell time (entry as revolving of the work part) A indicates the dwell time after each recessing infeed.
124
G87
Changing machining settings of the cycle
The standard settings of the recessing cycle G87 can be changed by setting one or more switches O or Q as follows:
Please note that the address O can be programmed several times and in each case with different values within the NC command G87. O0 Travel path optimizing If the switch is set O0 no travel path optimizing is done for the tool movement with reference to the raw part. Depending on the starting point of the cycle empty moves are correspondingly possible. O1 Roughing If the switch is set O1 the infeed levels calculated by the recessing cycle are being roughed with the recessing chisel and not tapped with the programmed set-off. O2 Finishing of the contour If the switch is set O2 the cycle G87 leaves the machined steps after each infeed without final milling to mill them at the end of the cycle only (finishing of the contour). O3 O4 Machining from left to right If the switch is set O3 the recessing is machined from the left to right. Machining valley by valley or level by level If the switch is set O4 the recessing is machined valley by valley. The control processes each valley (=local recessing minimum) one by one. Sharp valleys within the programmed recessing contour are machined by the cycle G87 up to the depth where the width of the valley and the width of the applied recessing chisel are identical. O5 Machining direction not bidirectional If the switch is set O5 the programmed recessing is not machined bidirectional but in the direction as specified with O3. O6 Finishing/adjusting Using the switch O6 finishing of the recess contour is programmed. Prior to using the switch O6 recessing cycle with a finishing allowance equidistant has to be called with the command G57 B... . Please note that the contour description of the recessing has to be repeated when calling prior to G87 O6. Q1 Plane recessing If the switch is set to Q1 the control is instructed to interpret the contour as a plane recess.
MTS GmbH 1998
125
G87
Programming hints
The recessing cycle G87 can only be used with recessing tools or with copying tools with round turntable. If some other tool is selected at the time of the cycle call the following error message is displayed: Correction values cannot be machined. The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cycle call G87 or in the first NC block with a travel path command. The complete contour path to be machined is specified in the subsequent NC blocks. The contour description is completed and at the same time the machining started with the command G80. When using G80 It is possible to set a window frame for a part contour to be machined. Immediately after the cycle G87 has been programmed the simulator is able to use a previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G87, as an alternative to the description of the contour. This can be done with the command G51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary to program the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window (also see cycle G80). The cycle G87 then processes only those parts of the programmed nominal contour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it might occur that the nominal contour is split into several contour sections by the limiting window. The cycle consequently generates only those contour sections which can be machined with the selected tool. If machining is to take place with tool nose radius compensation G41 or G42 has to be called immediately after the NC block with G87 cycle, i.e. prior to the programming of the contour. Switching off tool nose radius compensation has to take place after contour description, prior to the cycle call G80. Finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed using the command G57. If the diameter of the current tool position is in case of outside machining larger or in case of inside machining smaller than the diameter of the end point of the programmed contour at the moment the cycle G87 is being called, then the end point will be extended parallel to the axis respectively either to the outside or inside up to the diameter of the current tool position.
Based on the application limits of the axial recessing tools because of the diameter (from Dmin to Dmax) the following limitations apply to plane recessing: One plane recessing cycle G87 is allowed to have only one recessing minimum (=valley). If plane recessing is to include several local recessing minima (=valleys) several successive recessing cycle calls have to be programmed. In that case different tools have to be used. The lowest straight line to be machined in the recess parallel to the X axis Xmin to Xmax has to overlap with the range of application diameter of the tool Dmin to Dmax at minimum by the width of the recessing tool.
126
G87
Recessing 1 with one local recessing minimum Recessing 2 with one local recessing minimum Recessing chisel 1 for machining recessing 1 Recessing chisel 2 for machining recessing 2
Plane recessing with two local recessing minima
The full plane recessing contour as described in the above figure can only be created with two successive recessing cycles as the contour has more than one local recessing minimum. Plane recess: recess into solid material (a) = overlapping area
The plane recess described in the above figure can be machined with the selected recessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of the tool overlaps the lowest-located straight line in the recess, parallel to X axis, Xmax - Xmin by more than the width of the recessing tool Plane recess: recess into solid material (b) = overlapping area
The plane recess described in the above figure can be just and just machined with the selected recessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of the tool is exactly as wide as the lowest-located straight line in the recess to be machined, Xmax - Xmin, parallel to X axis, by more than the width of the recessing tool.
MTS GmbH 1998
127
G87
Plane recess: recess into solid material (c)
= overlapping area
The recess described in the above figure cannot be machined with the selected recessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of the tool overlaps the lowest-located straight line to be machined in the recess, Xmax - Xmin, parallel to the X axis, by less than the width of the recessing tool. NC addresses when programming a recessing cycle (straight recessing) = programmed contour = programmed contour starting point = enlarged detail of the cutting edge of the recessing tool = travel movements of the recessing tool (bidirectional machining from the right to the left (and always changing the machining direction)
Machining is carried out bidirectionally (standard) starting form the right to the left and always changing the machining direction. Programming example Recessing cycle (straight recess) ... N045 G00 X+110 Z+5 N050 G57 B+1 N055 G87 X+100 Z-90 I+5 H+20 N060 ... ... ... Description of the contour... ... N120 G80 ...
128
G87
= programmed contour = roughing (switch 01) of the first infeed plane
Roughing (O1) with recessing cycle G87 (straight recess)
Roughing is carried out bidirectionally (standard), starting from the right to the left or starting from the left to the right (switch O3) and always changing the machining direction. If the optional switch O5 (machining not bidirectional) has been switched on the recessing cycle machines also roughing in the machining direction only as defined with O3. Final finishing of the contour (02) in recessing cycle G87 (straight recess)
Machining direction from the right (03) to the left in recessing cycle G87 (straight recess)
= programmed contour = programmed contour starting point = Travel movements of the recessing tool
MTS GmbH 1998
129
G87
Machining is carried out bidirectionally (standard), starting form the left to the right and then always changing the machining direction. If the optional switch O5 (machining not bidirectional) has been switched on the recessing cycle machines only from the left to the right without changing the machining direction. Partial machining (04) in recessing cycle G87 (straight recess)
Finishing (O6) in recessing cycle G87 (straight recess)
130
Radius/Chamfer Cycle
G88
5.20 Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88

The previous cycles G87 (radius) and G88 (chamfer) in the version 5.x were combined to one cycle G88 in the version 6. Function With the cycle G88 it is possible to make radiusing or to chamfer in lines parallel to the axis. Hereby it is possible to go to the transition radius or to the chamfer together with the tangenting contour elements or separately one by one.
NC command Addresses
G88 X... Z... R...

X, Z Coordinates of the Corner Point the Cycle is to be Performed at The control determines the location of the radius or of the chamfer according to the current tool quadrants and tool position. R Choice of Alternatives: Radius or Chamfer R+... = The cycle machines a radius with a radius R. R-... = The cycle machines a radius of length R.
Programming hints
If the cycle G88 is programmed within a sequence of contour elements the individual contour elements are being processed starting from the starting point of the full contour. If the contour element is located prior to the radiusing/the chamfer parallel to X or Z axis it is not necessary to program it within the contour element as its path is already defined by the corner point coordinates of the cycle G88. Within contour programming radiusing or chamfers can also be programmed with the following general commands: G01 X... Z... R... or G71 X... Z... R... and the following contour element can also be programmed with them. The radiusing radius or the length of the chamfer is hereby given as the address R. If the cycle G88 is programmed separately the starting position (=actual tool position) is to be considered during cycle invocation: the control calculates the direction of the radius or chamfer based on the contour to be approached. The contour which is parallel to the axis and which is located closest to the actual tool position is interpreted as the contour which is to be approached. The tool has to be positioned in the approach area (see figures) prior to the invocation of the cycle. The location of the starting point for the various alternatives of separate programming of one radiusing or chamfer is being discussed in the following. The travel movement of the tool takes place, as a rule, starting from the starting point (= current tool position when calling the cycle) to the starting point of the radiusing/chamfer (on the current contour to be gone to) to the end point of radiusing/chamfer.
MTS GmbH 1998
131
G88
Creating radius for outer corner
Radius/Chamfer Cycle = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed corner point of the radius = starting point of the complete contour = end point of the complete contour
Programming example Creating radius for outer corner
... N165 G42 N170 G00 X+50 Z+5 N175 G01 Z-30 N180 G88 X+110 Z-30 R+10 N185 G01 Z-80 N190 G40 ... The radius at the outer corner and the neighboring contour elements are machined together.
Creating radius for inner corner
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed corner point of the radius = starting point of the complete contour = end point of the complete contour
Programming example Creating radius for inner corner
... N165 G42 N170 G00 X+50 Z+5 N175 G88 X+50 Z-35 R+10 N180 G01 X+110 N185 G40 ... The radius at the inner corner and the neighboring contour elements are machined together.
132
Radius/Chamfer Cycle Creating chamfer for outer corner
G88
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed corner point of the chamfer = starting point of the complete contour = end point of the complete contour
Programming example Creating chamfer for outer corner
... N165 G42 N170 G00 X+50 Z+5 N175 G01 Z-30 N180 G88 X+110 Z-30 R-10 N185 G01 Z-80 N190 G40 ... The chamfer at the outer corner and the neighboring contour elements are machined together.
Position of the starting point when going separately to the rounding at outer corner
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed corner point of the rounding = starting point of the rounding = end point of the rounding = approach contour parallel to X axis = approach area where the tool is to be positioned when calling the cycle
MTS GmbH 1998
133
G88
Position of the starting point when going separately to the rounding at outer corner
Radius/Chamfer Cycle = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed corner point of the rounding = starting point of the rounding = end point of the rounding = approach contour parallel to Z axis = approach area where the tool is to be positioned when calling the cycle = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed end point of the chamfer = starting point of the chamfer = end point of the chamfer = approach contour parallel to X axis = approach area where the tool is to be positioned when calling the cycle = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed end point of the chamfer = starting point of the chamfer = end point of the rounding = approach contour parallel to Z axis = approach contour where the tool is to be positioned when calling the cycle
Position of the starting point when machining separately a chamfer at outer corner
Position of the starting point when machining separately a chamfer at inner corner
134
Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour)
G89
5.21 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) G89

The cycles G65 (straight roughing cycle, conical contour) and G66 (plane roughing cycle, conical contour) in the version 5.x are replaced by a new cycle G89 in the version 6. Function Using G89 a straight or a plane roughing cycle with conical outer contour can be programmed. The generated tool geometry is a cylinder with a tapered sleeve. The cycle can be used for machining the outer or inner surface.
NC Command
G89 X... Z... S.../D... Y.../E.../(A... B...) O... [I...] [K...] [H... W...] [R... V...] [L...]
Addresses of the straight roughing cycle G89 for outside and inside machining
Addresses
X, Z
Coordinates of the rectangle point This rectangle point, as a corner located opposite to the starting point of the cycle (current tool position), describes a rectangle on whose sides all the contour points of the conical contour are located . Please, note: When processing the cycle G89 the control interprets during programming in a straight roughing cycle the X coordinate of the starting point (=current tool position when calling the cycle) as a X coordinate of the end point of the conical sleeve, in a plane roughing cycle the Z coordinate of the starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) as the Z coordinate of the end point of the conical sleeve This requires that the tool is positioned at the desired X and Z coordinate of the end point of the conical sleeve prior to calling the cycle. Number of cuts to be made If S is being programmed the control calculates the corresponding infeed. As an alternative to S, D can be programmed.
F
S
Infeed (referring to the radius)
When processing the cycles the infeed can deviate from the programmed value as it depends on the optional addresses R, V and L. As an alternative to D, S can be programmed. Y E X or Z coordinate of the contour point the conical sleeve begins at Alternatively, either E or A, B can be programmed. Inclination angle of the conical sleeve against the negative Z axis (straight roughing) or against the negative X axis (plane roughing) When outside machining of the work part is being programmed E has to be programmed with a positive sign. For the inside machining of the work part a negative sign is used. Alternatively, either Y or A, B can be programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
135
G89
A, B Cone parameters
The inclination of the cone can also be programmed based on the relation of the lines A and B. Hereby A represents the line in direction X (referring to the radius) and B the line in direction Z. Alternatively, Y and E can be programmed. O Options: straight or plane roughing O0 O1 Optional Addresses I K H Straight roughing cycle (old: G65) Plane roughing cycle (old: G66)
Finishing allowance in X (referring to radius) Finishing allowance in Z Chip breaking, infeed interruption in X and Z direction H indicates the length of the line after which the infeed is interrupted to break the chip. H and W have to be programmed together.
Chip breaking, return path of the tool in X or Z direction W specifies the path the tool has to return after chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together.
R V L
Decrease of infeed D per cut When entering R both D and V need to have been programmed already. Minimum infeed D When entering V, both D and R need to have been programmed already. Optimizing final machining cycle length A non-fraction percentage value (1 <= L <= 100) is programmed as L for the infeed D. The control then increases the infeed for the last roughing plane at maximum by the per cent value stored under L, if the final machining cycle does not need to be carried out in full length to complete the work part into its final form.
Programming hints
Unlike the axis-parallel straight or plane roughing cycles G75 and G76 which carry out machining at a straight angle against the cutting surface, the cycle G89 moves the tool in a specified angle starting from a specified point to the end point of the programmed contour. In this way conical contours can be roughed For the starting point of the cone the following programming options are available: 1. Enter the value for Y, at which the X or Z coordinates of the contour point the cone begin. 2. Enter the inclination angle E of the cone in relation to the negative Z axis (straight roughing) or in relation to the negative X axis (plane roughing). 3. Enter the relation of the lines A and B. The cycle G89 is executed immediately after it has been programmed. When processing the cycle G89 the control interprets during programming in a straight roughing cycle the X coordinate of the starting point (=current tool position when calling the cycle) as the X coordinate of the cone end point, in a plane roughing cycle the Z coordinate of the starting point (=current tool position when calling the cycle) as the Z coordinate of the cone end point. This requires that the tool is positioned at the desired X and Z coordinate of the end point of the conical sleeve prior to calling the cycle.
136
G89
= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed rectangle point = cone end point (the X coordinate of this point is derived from the X coordinate of the starting point) = cone starting point
Straight roughing cycle (outside machining)
Programming example Straight roughing cycle (outside machining)
... N125 G00 X+102 Z+3 N130 G89 X+45 Z-52.5 D+4 Y-32.5 O+0 ... When machining outside surfaces the X coordinate of the starting point is the X coordinate of the cone end point as well. The inclination angle E is programmed with a positive sign starting clockwise from the negative Z axis. = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed rectangle point = cone end point (the X coordinate of this point is calculated based on the X coordinate of the starting point ) = cone starting point
Straight roughing cycle (inside machining)
Programming example Straight roughing cycle (inside machining)
... N100 G00 X+18 Z+3 N105 G89 X+75 Z-52.5 S8 E-54 O+0 ... When machining the inside of the work part the X coordinate of the starting point has to be smaller than or equal to the diameter of the premachined inside contour. The angle of inclination E is programmed with a negative sign starting counterclockwise from the negative Z axis.
MTS GmbH 1998
137
G89
Plane roughing cycle (outside machining)
Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) = starting point (current tool location when calling the cycle) = programmed rectangle point = cone end point (the Z coordinate of this point is calculated based on the Z coordinate of the starting point) = cone starting point
Programming example Plane roughing cycle (outside machining)
... N180 G00 X+15 Z+3 N185 G89 X+30 Z-50 D+6 Y-60 O+1 ... The X coordinate of the starting point has to be larger than or equal to the diameter of the premachined work part outside contour. The angle of inclination E is programmed with a positive sign starting counterclock-wise from the negative X axis. = starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = programmed rectangle point = cone end point (the Z coordinate of this point is calculated based on the Z coordinate of the starting point) = cone starting point
Plane roughing cycle (inside machining)
Programming example Plane roughing cycle (inside machining)
... N220 G00 X+102 Z+3 N225 G89 X+100 Z-52.5 D+4 Y+62.5 O+1 ... The X coordinate of the starting point has to be smaller than the diameter of the premachined work part inside contour. The angle of inclination E is programmed with a negative sign starting clockwise from the negative X axis.
138
Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) Interrupting infeed for chip breaking a) for straight or plane roughing
G89
a) for plane roughing
In case of chip breaking H specifies the string after which the infeed movement is interrupted. W specifies the string the tool moves backwards before starting to machine the string H again. Degression of cutting depth and minimum infeed for straight roughing = remaining infeed ( 2,5 mm)
Programming example Degression of cutting depth and minimum infeed for straight roughing
Infeed D=4 mm Decrease R=0,5 mm Minimum infeed V=2,5 mm In this example the programmed infeed D is reduced by the value R after each machining run. The value V specifies that the infeed is to be reduced at maximum up to 2,5 mm and remains valid for the remaining machining runs.
MTS GmbH 1998
139
G89
Degression of cutting depth and minimum infeed for plane roughing
Programming example Degression of cutting depth and minimum infeed for plane roughing
Infeed D=4 mm Decrease R=0,5 mm Minimum infeed V=2,5 mm In this example the programmed infeed D is reduced by the value R after each machining run. The value V specifies that the infeed is to be reduced at maximum up to 2,5 mm and remains valid for the remaining machining runs.
Final roughing optimizing for straight roughing
= final optimizing level for roughing
Programming example Final roughing optimizing for straight roughing
Infeed D=4 mm Final optimizing L=25% In case of the programmed infeed D, for the last two cuts a roughing level of 5 mm in total remains. Normally, two additional machining runs would be needed to machine the remaining 5 mm. Using the final roughing optimizing the infeed is however increased by 25 % up to 5 mm at maximum. Through this procedure one machining run less is needed.
140
Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) Final roughing optimizing for plane roughing
G89
= final optimizing level for roughing
Programming example Final roughing optimizing for plane roughing
Infeed D=4 mm Final roughing optimizing L=25% In case of the programmed infeed D, for the last two cuts a roughing level of 5 mm in total remains. Normally, two additional machining runs would be needed to machine the remaining 5 mm. Using the final roughing optimizing the infeed is however increased by 50 % up to 5 mm at maximum. Through this procedure one machining run less is needed.
MTS GmbH 1998
141
Segment Contour Programming
6 Segment Contour Programming

To meet the requirements of NC machining, the workpiece dimension specification must contain all coordinates necessary to comply with DIN 66025 for the programming of the end point of a straight line or a circular arc, or of the centre of a circle. In fact, workshop drawings of workpieces often lack som of the required dimensions, and extensive mathematical calculations are often required to establish the coordinates. A contour string is defined as an oriented succession of entities (segments), namely straight lines and circular arcs, describing a contour of the workpiece. In addition to the starting and end points or centre points, angles, lengths, tangential transitions, roundings and chamfers, as are necessary for geometric definitions without auxiliary calculations, may also be entered. When segment contour programming is selected, transition points or end points of entities will be computed by the control system, with the effect that coordinates can be entered as specified in the workshop drawing.
6.1 G-Functions for Contour String Programming
F
Definition
G71 Linear Interpolation (analogous to G01) G72 Circular Interpolation: Clockwise (analogous to G02) G73 Circular Interpolation: Counterclockwise (analogous to G03)
G71, G72 and G73 are non-modal commands, i.e. they take effect only in the block in which they are programmed. Even if address values remain unchanged, they must be programmed once again in the subsequent NC block. To structure the input of geometry, which will be necessary with a complex contour string consisting of numerous entities, a so-called multi-point string (N-point string) is defined, namely as follows: An N-point string is defined as a sequence of N-1 entities with N points, from a given starting point P0 to the end point PN-1, whose coordinates may either be entered or computed by the the control system from the data specified for the Npoint string. Specification of the dimensions of the last entity is required for the computing of the previous entity and its end point coordinates. Starting out from the given point P0 a closed N-point string can be computed. It follows that any contour can be computed as a sequence of linked N-point strings. Common multi-point strings are the following: Two-Point Strings Three-Point Strings Four-Point Strings Consisting of one entity Consisting of two entities Consisting of three entities
142
G-Functions for Contour String Programming
Two-Point Strings (N=2)

Two-Point Strings define a single entity, either a straight line or a circular arc. With the starting point P0 given, the end point P1 will be computed according to the dimensions specified.
Diagram 6.1 :
Two-Point Strings
Three-Point Strings (N=3)

Three-Point Strings comprise two entities. The following combinations are possible: 1. 2. 3. 4. line - line line - arc arc - line arc - arc
Diagram 6.2 :
Three-Point Strings
MTS GmbH 1998
143
Additional Addresses
Addresses for Contour String Programming
Straight line G71

X/Z A L Target point coordinates in directions X and Z Angle of the line to the positive X-axis Length of the line
Diagram 6.3 :
As a rule a line is defined by two of the above addresses. However the solution will not neccessarily be uniquely defined.
Diagram 6.3.1 : Example:
Diagram 6.3.2 :
Diagram 6.3.3 :
The end coordinate Z and the length L of a line are given. A circle with the centre P0 and the radius L intersects the vertical line Z at the points P1 and P2 (see Diagram 6.3.1). If the distance between the vertical line Z and P0 is exactly L, the vertical line touches the circle and there will be a single possible solution (see Diagram 6.3.2). If the distance between the vertical line Z and P0 is greater than L, there will be no solution (see Diagram 6.3.3). It follows that the number of possible solutions is two, one or none.
Circular arc G72 or G73

X/Z I/K A B E Target point coordinates in X and Z Circle centre coordinates in X and Z (incremental or absolute) Arc starting angle to the positive Z-axis Arc radius Arc end angle
Diagram 6.4 :
Three of the above addresses must be specified to define a circular arc. Again the number of possible solutions as a rule will be two, one or none.
144
Tool Nose Compensation TNC
Programming Hints
Programming of the X and Z coordinates is not mandatory. It follows that the respective values are not global, i.e. even identical values will have to be programmed once again to define the next entity in a contour string. To compute a contour segment the control system will refer to the values specified in the NC block. If these specifications should prove insufficient, the conditions of transition to the previous or to the next contour entity will be accounted for in the computing.
Example
The chosen example is a three-point string, consisting of two lines. The following addresses have been defined: 1st. line 2nd. line X-Coordinate of the end point X- and Z-Coordinates of the end point plus the angle A of the line to the positive Z axis
NC Block:
G71 X... G71 X... Z... A...

Although the first line has not been defined, the system will compute the contour resulting from both lines: Diagram 6.5 : - The starting point P0 of the contour string is defined by the current tool position. - The end point of the first line P1 is situated on a parallel X1 to the Z - axis. - The end point P2 and the position of the second line are determined by the angle A and the X and Z coordinates. Diagram 6.6 : - The contour is uniquely defined, since the second line and the parallel line X1 intersect at point P1.
Diagram 6.5 If A=0 or A=180 : no solution! If X1=X2 : if A=0 or A=180: infinite number of solutions! If A is unequal to 0 and unequal to 180: no solution! Diagram 6.6
MTS GmbH 1998
145
Additional Addresses
6.2 Additional Addresses

In addition to the addresses for geometric dimensioning, as specified above, the system provides the addresses O and R for further simplification of contour programming. The addresses O and R serve to select one of two alternative solutions. They also allow a chamfer or rounding to be inserted between to consecutive straight lines, without additional computing efforts. Tangential transitions to a line or to an arc can be programmed to be automatically computed. The following table lists the additional addresses available. More detailed explanations are given in the subsequent sections.
Address
O070 O000 O001/O002 R+ O011/O012 R-
Function
Absolute coordinates of the centre of the circle Tangential transition to the previous segment Selection of one of two possible solutions Insertion of a rounding between two segments Selection of one of two possible solutions with R+ Insertion of a chamfer between two linear segments
146
Circle Centres Absolute
6.2.1 Circle Centres Absolute

The coordinates of the center of an arc (defined by addresses I and K) may either be programmed incremental to the starting point of the arc (P0) or relative to the zero point (absolute) (see Diagram 6.7). Conforming to general standards, the default configuration of the CNC Simulator is the incremental programming of the centre of the circle. If the coordinates of both centres are to be entered in the absolute system, the word O070 must be entered in that NC block which contains the programmed coordinates of the circular arc. With multi point strings the centre of an arc must be programmed using the absolute system, since the starting point is normally not given, but must be calculated by the control system. The execption to this rule is when the arc is the first entry of a contour.
Arc centres incremental
Arc centres absolute
NC Block: G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. Diagram 6.7 Programming Hints
NC Block:
G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O070
When O070 is programmed, both centre coordinates (I and K) must be entered as absolute values. O070 is not a self-retaining entry. It must be re-entered once again with each NC block, even if these are consecutive. If the circle centres (I and K) of the three-point and four-point strings represented below are entered in the absolute system, the input applies to the starting point P0 of the N-point string. If in the configuration the programming of circle centres has been set to the absolute system, the programming of O070 will not be necessary.
MTS GmbH 1998
147
Tangential Transitions
6.2.2 Tangential Transitions

It is quite common, especially with turning operations, for adjoining entities of a workpiece contour not to intersect at two points but instead touch at exactly one common point. This is called a tangential transition between entities (see Diagram 6.8).
Diagram 6.8 Such tangential transitions are possible between a straight line and a circular arc as well as between two circular arcs.(see Diagram 6.9).
Diagram 6.9 Explanation When a starting point is given, two addresses are normally required to determine a straight line, three to determine a circular arc. However if the line or arc is connected to the previous contour segment by a tangential transition, the number of addresses to be programmed can be reduced by one by a tangential transition. The control system will refer to the geometric definition of the tangential transition of two entities to determine the next entity.
148
Example
Next to a circular arc with the starting point P0 and the end point P1 (see Diagrams 6.10 and 6.11) a straight line is to be programmed, of which only the end point coordinate Z is given. The starting point of that line is determined by the end point P1 of the arc. If only the Z-coordinate of the line is given, the end point cannot be determined, because an infinite number of solutions exist (see Diagram 6.10) If however the line is connected tangentially to the arc, its direction is determined by the tangent angle at point P1. The end point P2 of the line is defined by the intersection of the tangent with the given Z-coordinate (see Diagram 6.11).
Diagram 6.10
Diagram 6.11
Programming Hints
A tangential transition between two contour entities is programmed by the NC word O000. O000 must be entered in an NC block, together with the entity tangentially connected to the preceding entity. With all contour strings including a tangential transition the programming of the starting angle A (rise of a line or tangent angle at the starting point P in the direction of the circle orientation) may be replaced by the instruction O000 for a tangential transition.
MTS GmbH 1998
149
Pointed Tangential Transitions

When specific combinations of addresses are programmed for tangential transitions, a number of different mathematical solutions may result. Example A straight line with a defined starting point P0 as well as a circular arc (G72) with a defined centre (I and K) and defined end point coordinates (X and Z) are given. If there is a tangential transition of the straight line to the arc, two possible solutions may result from the computing (see. Diagram 6.12). 1st solution: the straight line is connected to the circle at the tangential point P1-1, in the direction of the circle orientation (see Diagram 6.13). the straight line is connected to the circle at the tangential point P1-2, opposite to the direction of the circle orientation (see Diagram 6.14).
2nd solution:
Diagram 6.12
Diagram 6.13
Diagram 6.14
For reasons of clarification the contour resulting from the 2nd solution will be denoted in the following as "pointed tangential transition". Version 5 of the Simulator provides the option of programming both solutions (cf.Section 6.1.3.4 Selection of Solutions - Tangential Transitions). Roundings may also be inserted between entities in the case of pointed tangential transitions (see Diagram 6.15).
Diagram 6.15
150
Selection of Solutions
6.2.3 Selection of Solutions

Depending on the addresses programmed, there may sometimes be two possible mathematical solutions for the definition of a contour segment (see Diagram 6.16). Consequently, the control system must be told which contour to use. The following criteria serve to distinguish between the alternatives:
Angle Criterion:
smaller or greater angle
Length Criteria:
shorter or longer line (line criterion) smaller or greater arc (arc criterion)
The word O001 selects the first of the alternatives, O002 the second.
Priority of the Angle Criterion

If the two solutions have different angles as well as different lengths of line, the angle criterion must be used in the selection.
Programmed addresses: Z Z-Coordinate of the end point
I/K Centre coordinates As only the Z-coordinate of the end point is given, both P1-1 and P1-2 are possible end points of the contour.
Diagram 6.16 : Programming Hints
Example for application of the arc criterion If no selection of alternatives (O001 or O002) is programmed, the control system will automatically select the first alternative (O001). For clarity, it is recommended to specify O001 anyway, so as to indicate that there are two possible solutions with a specific combination of addresses.
MTS GmbH 1998
151
Selection of Solutions - Angle Criterion

In the following a three-point string, consisting of a line and an arc, serves as an example of the application of angle criterion to select one of the alternative solutions.
Given addresses: L I,K X,Z Length of the line Coordinates of the centre of the arc Coordinates of the end of the arc
NC block G71 L... G72 X... O001 or O002 Z... I... K... O070
Diagram 6.17 : Explanation
Angle criterion for selection of a solution The end point of the line is situated on a circle with the radius L . The position of the arc is determined by its centre (I and K, as absolute coordinates) and by its (absolute) end point coordinates X and Z.
Under these conditions in the example given, the following solutions may result: Solutions No solution depending on the length L if the specified value L is either too small or too great, the end point of the line will not be situated on the arc => no solution; results of the computation and an appropriate error message will appear if L equals the shortest distance between the circular arc and the starting point P0, a tangential point is establisheda => single solution results the specified length L results in two intersection points P1-1 and P1-2 => two solutions
Single solution
Two solutions
Selection by the Angle The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different angles to the positive Zaxis (angle criterion): Criterion To select the first solution (smaller angle to the Z-axis) O001 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P To select the second solution (greater angle to the Z-axis) O002 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P Programming Hints To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in the same NC block together as the applicable line.
152
Selection of Solutions - Line Criterion

A three-point string, comprising a line and an arc, serves as an example of the application of the line criterion in selecting a solution.
Given addresses: A I,K X,Z Angle of the line to the positive Zaxis Coordinates of the centre of the arc Coordinates of the end of the arc
NC block G71 A... G72 X...
O001 or O002 Z... I... K...
O070
Line criterion for selection of a solution The end point of the line starting at P0 is situated on a half line at an angle A to the positive Z-axis. The position of the arc is determined by its centre (I and K, as absolute coordinates) and by its (absolute) end point coordinates X and Z.
Under these conditions in the example given, the following solutions may result: Solution No solution dependent on the angle A with the specified angle A neither a tangential point nor an intersection point will result => no solution - an appropriate error message will appear with the specified angle A exactly one tangential point will result => a single solution (tangent to the arc) with the specified angle A the half line will intersect the arc at both the points P1-1 and P1-2 => two solutions
Single solution Two solutions
Selection by the Line Criterion
The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different lengths of the line (line criterion): To select the first solution (shorter line) O001 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P To select the second solution (longer line) O002 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P
Programming Hints
To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in an NC block together with the applicable line.
MTS GmbH 1998
153
Selection of Solutions - Arc Criterion

A three-point string, comprising a line and an arc, serves as an example of the application of the arc criterion in selecting an alternative.
Given addresses: I,K X,Z L Coordinates of the centre of the arc Coordinates of the end of the arc Length of the line
NC block G72 I... K... (O070) O001 or O002 G71 X... Z... L...
Selection of solutions by the arc criterion. Position and radius of the arc are defined by the centre coordinates I and K and by the starting point P0. The end point of the contour is determined by the coordinates X and Z. The starting point of the line is situated on a circle of the radius L.
Under these conditions in the example given, the following solutions may result: Solution No solution dependent on the length L if the value of L is either to small or to great, the starting point will not be situated on the arc => no solution - an error message will appear from the specified value L results exactly one tangential point => single solution from the specified value L result the two intersection points P1-1 and P1-2 => two solutions
Single solution Two solutions
Selection by the Arc Criterion
The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different lengths of the arc (arc criterion): To select the first solution (shorter arc) O001 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P To select the second solution (longer arc) O002 is programmed Course of the contour:P -> P - -> P
Programming Hints
To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in an NC block together with the applicable line.
154
Selection of Solutions - Tangential Transitions Tangent Criterion

Depending on the addresses programmed, different solutions of tangential transitions between contour segments may result. Example A given line with a known starting point P0 is to be joined tangentially to a circular arc (G72) which is determined by its centre (I and K) and its end point coordinates (X and Z). Two mathematical solutions are possible with this example (see Diagram 6.20a). 1. 2. the line joins the arc at the point P1-1 in the same direction as the circle orientation. the line joins the arc at the point P1-2 in the direction opposite to the circle orientation (pointed tangential transition).
In previous versions of the Simulator only the first solution could be computed by the control system (see Diagram 6.20b). Version 5 now permits the programming of both solutions in any given case.
Diagram 6.20a
Diagram 6.20b
Diagram 6.20c
To inform the control system of the desired course of the contour, address O001 must be programmed to select the first solution (tangent in the direction of the circle orientation), or address O002 to select the second solution (tangent in the opposite direction). The selected solution (either O001 or O002) must always be programmed in a NC block together with the first contour entity whose orientation is determined by that selection. Consequently the NC blocks of the example shown above (see Diagram 6.20c) would have to be programmed as follows: 1st solution O001: G71 O001 G72 X... Z... I... K... O000
F
MTS GmbH 1998
2nd solution O002: G71 O002 G72 X... Z... I... K... O000 When programming in the WOP mode (Workshop Oriented Programming), the function key <F5> serves to permit the programming of pointed tangents or not (cf. the WOP User Manual). If the option "pointed tangential transition" is deactivated, the control system automatically computes the contour solution O001. Separate programming of a solution will not be necessary.
155
Contrary to the "standard" tangential transitions, the "pointed" transitions can be rounded (see Diagram 6.20d). Programming Hints When programming in the WOP mode (Workshop-Oriented Programming), the option "pointed tangential transitions" must be activated to program a rounding radius R+.
NC Block: G71 R+.. O002 O011 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O000
Diagram 6.20d :
Rounding of a pointed tangential transition
156
Rounding between Two Entities
6.3 Rounding between Two Entities

At the point of transition between two entities a rounding can be inserted, by programming the address R+. The value entered at R+ determines the radius of the rounding. Roundings can be inserted between any combination of contour entities, provided that the entities intersect or touch at a tangential point. If two possible solutions for the rounding arc have been computed (see Diagram 6.21), the arc criterion is applied by specificying either O011 (smaller arc) or O012 (greater arc).
G71 A.. R+.. O011 or O012 G71 X.. Z.. A..
Diagram 6.21 : Programming Hints
Example of a rounding between two straight lines If no selection of alternative solutions (O011 or O012) is programmed, the control system will compute the execution of the smaller arc O011. If two solutions for the positioning of the entities already exist, the insertion of a rounding may result in four different solutions.
Example
On the basis of the addresses programmed with a three-point string, consisting of a line and an arc, two mathematical solutions are possible (see Diagram 6.22 : P1-1 and P1-2).
G71 X.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
Diagram 6.22 :
MTS GmbH 1998
Two solutions of a contour comprising a line and an arc.
157
Rounding between Two Entities
In the example shown above the angle criterion is used to determine the contour: O001 is programmed to select the line situated at the smaller angle to the Z-axis, O002 to select the line with the greater angle. If additionally a rounding radius R+is programmed, each contour solution gives two possible rounding radii with each contour solution. (see Diagram 6.23): Analogous to employing the arc criterion, the desired rounding must be programmed in the NC block determining the contour, by entering either O011 (smaller arc) or O012 (greater arc). Alternative roundings possible with the first contour solution O001 Alternative roundings possible with the second contour solution O002
G71 X.. O001 O011 or O012 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) Diagram 6.23 :
G71 X.. O002 O011 or O012 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
Selection of solutions from a total of four alternatives If the specified rounding radius results in only one possible rounding arc with each of the contour solutions, programming of O011 or O012 is not required (see Diagram 6.24).
G72 I.. K.. R+.. (O070) O011 or O012 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K..
Diagram 6.24 :
In this example the specified rounding radius results in only one solution for each arc.
158
Chamfer between Two Lines
6.3.1 Chamfer between Two Lines

At the additional address R a symmetrical chamfer between two consecutive lines can be programmed. The contour will be computed by the control system according to the specified width of the chamfer (the value entered at R) (see Diagram 6.25).
NC Block: G71 A.. R-.. G71 X.. Z.. A..
Diagram 6.25
MTS GmbH 1998
159
G71
Two-Point Strings : Straight Lines
6.4 Two-Point String: Straight Line G71

Any two of the addresses below can be used to program a straight line as a twopoint string, provided that the starting point P0 is known: X Z L A X-coordinate of the end point Z-coordinate of the end point Length of the line Angle of the line to the positive Z-axis
Optional addresses: X/Z L A Coordinates of the end point of the line Length of the line Angle of the line to the positive Z-axis
Diagram 6.2.1 : Number of Solutions
Diagram 6.2.1 : Two-Point String : Straight Line Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution. When, for instance, the length or an axially parallel angle has been entered, the result may be either two solutions or no solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). If no solution is found, a corresponding error message will appear. If two solutions result from the specified length L (cf. the table below), the desired contour must be determined by using the angle criterion (O001 for the smaller angle, O002 for the greater angle).
Programming Hints
160
Two-Point String : Straight Line
G71
Table of Available Two-Point Strings:
Straight Line G71 X Z G71 X L G71 X A G71 Z L G71 Z A G71 L A
Selction of Solutions
Angle Criterion
Angle Criterion
Examples of Contour Strings with Alternative Solutions
G71 X.. L.. O001 or O002
G71 Z.. L.. O001 or O002
The angle criterion determines the selection: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
MTS GmbH 1998
161
G72/G73
Two-Point Strings: Circular Arcs
6.5 Two-Point String: Arc G72/G73

Any three of the below addresses can be used to program a circular arc as a twopoint string, provided that the starting point P0 is known: X Z I K A B E X-coordinate of the end point Z-coordinate of the end point X-coordinate of the centre of the circle Z-coordinate of the centre of the circle Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the starting point P0 Arc radius Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the end point P1
Available Addresses: X/Z I/K A Coordinates of the end point of the arc Coordinates of the centre of the arc Angle to the Z-axis of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the starting point P0 Arc radius Angle to the positive Z-axis of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the end point P1
B E
Two-Point String: Arc Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). With some combinations of addresses may result in one, two, or no solutions. Please see the below table for a listing of cases where two solutions may occur. If the circle centre coordinates are programmed in the absolute system, the address O070 must be programmed in the same NC block. To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are of course applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73) as well.
Programming Hints
162
Two-Point String: Circular Arc
G72/G73
Table of Available Two-Point Strings: Arc G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 G72/73 X Z I X Y K X Z A X I K Z I K X I A Z K A Z I A Z K A X A B Z A B X Z B X B E Z B E
Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion
MTS GmbH 1998
163
G72/G73
Examples of Two-Point Strings: Circular Arc with Alternative Solutions
Two-Point Strings: Circular Arcs
G72 X.. I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002
G72 Z.. I.. K..(O070) O001 or O002
The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 X.. I.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002
G72 X.. K.. A.. O001 or O002
G72 Z.. I.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002
G72 Z.. K.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002
164
Two-Point String: Circular Arc
G72/G73
G72 X.. A.. B.. O001 or O002
G72 Z.. A.. B.. O001 or O002
G72 X.. Z.. B.. O001 or O002 The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select the shorter arc, O002 is programmed to select the longer arc.
G72 X.. B.. E.. O001 or O002
G72 Z.. B.. E.. O001 or O002
The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select O1-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
165
G71G71
Three-Point String: Line - Line
6.6 Three-Point String: Line - Line
G71G71
Two consecutive straight lines can be programmed as a three-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string, the first line is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequent NC block, describing the second line. A total of four addresses must be programmed in the NC blocks.
Relevant addresses: X1/Z1 Coordinates of the end point of the first line Length of the first line L1 Angle of the first line to the A1 positive Z-axis X2/Z2 Coordinates of the end point of the second line Length of the second line L2 Angle of the second line to the A2 positive Z-axis
Three-point string comprising two straight lines Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two solutions or no solution. Please see the below table for a listing of cases where the programming of certain combinations of address values may result in the computation of two solutions - such cases are denoted "Arc Criterion" in the column "Selection of Solutions", and explanatory diagrams are provided. If two solutions result from the programmed address values, and if a selection (O001 or O002) is not programmed, the control system will assume the first solution O001. If two addresses are programmed in the first NC block, the three-point string is split into two two-point strings.
Programming Hints
F
166
G71G71
Table of Available Three-Point Strings: Line - Line G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 X X Z A X Z L A Z X Z A X X Z L Z X Z L Z X L A L X Z L L X Z A L X L A L Z L A A X Z L A X Z A A X L A A Z L A X X Z L A
Angle Criterion Angle Criterion Angle Criterion Angle Criterion Line Criterion Angle Criterion Angle Criterion
MTS GmbH 1998
167
G71G71
Examples of Three-Point Strings: G71G71 with Alternative Solutions
G71 X.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. L..
G71 Z.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. L..
The angle criterion is used to select of a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. L..
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. A..
168
G71G71
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. L.. A..
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G71 Z.. L.. A..
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. L.. The line criterion is used to select of a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).
MTS GmbH 1998
169
G72G71 or G73G71
Three-Point Strings: Arc - Line
6.7 Three-Point String: Arc - Line G72G71 or G73G71

A circular arc followed by a straight line can be programmed as a three-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a threepoint string, the arc is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequent NC block, describing the straight line. Optional Addresses As a first contour entity a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be defined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listed below must be programmed: I,K A,I A,K A,B Centre coordinates Starting angle and centre coordinate in X Starting angle and centre coordinate in Z Starting angle and radius
For reasons of clarity, only the centre coordinates (I and K) of arcs are shown in the diagrams below.
Optional Addresses: I/K A1 B X/Z Centre coordinates of the arc Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the starting point P0 Radius of the arc
Coordinates of the end point of the line L Length of the line Angle of the line to the positive ZA2 axis O000 Tangential transition between segments Diagram 6.5.1 : Three-point string consisting of a line and an arc To determine a three-point string consisting of a line and an arc, a total of five of the above addresses must be programmed. Number of solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two or no solution. In the case of contour strings with two possible solutions the arc criterion is used to select the desired contour, by programming, in the first NC block, either O001 (smaller arc) or O002 (greater arc). If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address O070 must be programmed in the same NC block.
Programming Hints
170
Three-Point String: Arc - Line
G72G71 or G73G71
Table of Available Three-Point Strings: Arc - Line G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 I K X Z A I K X Z L I K X L A I K Z L A
Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
Tangential Transition to the Line

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below, the word O000 must be programmed in the second NC block to define the tangential transition. When the WOP mode is operative, pointed tangential transitions may only be programmed if the appropriate option has been selected (function key <F5>).
Arc - Line G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 I K X Z O000 I K X A O000 I K X L O000 I K Z A O000 I K Z L O000 I K L A O000 B X Z A O000
Tangent Criterion
Arc Criterion
Tangent Criterion
Arc Criterion
Tangent Criterion
Arc Criterion
F
MTS GmbH 1998
Note: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by the addresses A,I, A,K or A,B, instead of with the centre coordinates I,K. This applies to all examples.
171
G72G71 or G73G71
Examples of Three-Point Strings:
G72G71 with Alternative Solutions

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are however also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. A..
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. L..
The angle criterion is used to select of a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 X.. L.. A..
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 Z.. L.. A..
The angle criterion is used to select of a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
172
G72G71 or G73G71
Examples of a Tangential Transition with Two Possible Solutions
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 X.. L.. O000
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G71 Z.. L.. O000
In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 B.. O001 or O002 G71 X.. Z.. A.. O000 The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
173
G72G71 or G73G71
Examples of Pointed Tangential Transitions

Pointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if this option has been selected with the function key <F5>.
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 G71 X.. A.. O000
G72 I.. K.. (O070) C+.. O002 O011 G71 X.. A.. O000
The tangent criterion is used to select a solution: O001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation (P1-1) O002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 G71 Z.. A.. O000
G72 I.. K.. (O070) R+.. O002 O011 G71 Z.. A.. O000
174
G72G71 or G73G71
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 G71 L.. A.. O000
G72 I.. K.. (O070) R+.. O002 O011 G71 L.. A.. O000
MTS GmbH 1998
175
G71G72 or G71G73
Three-Point String: Line - Arc
6.8 Three-Point String: Line - Arc G71G72 or G71G73

A straight line followed by a arc can be programmed as a three-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a threepoint string, the line is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequent NC block, describing the arc.
Optional Addresses: X1/Z1 Coordinates of the end point of the line L Length of the line A Angle of the line to the positive Zaxis X2/Z2 Coordinates of the end point of the arc I/K Coordinates of the centre of the arc B Radius of the arc E Angle to the positive Z-axis of the oriented tangent at the end point P2 O000 Tangential transition between entities Diagram 6.6.1 : Number of solutions Three-point string consisting of line and arc Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single unequivocal solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two, three, four or no solutions. If several solutions are possible the desired contour must be determined by entering O001 or O002. To determine a three-point string consisting of a line and an arc, a total of five of the above addresses must be programmed. Note: if more than one address is programmed for the line, this will determine the line as a two-point string, consequently the three-point string will be split up into two two-point strings. If absolute coordinates are entered for the centre of the circle, the address O070 must be programmed in the same NC block. To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are however also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).
Programming Hints
176
G71G72 or G71G73
Table of Available Three-Point Strings without Tangential Transition: Line - Arc G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 X X Z I K Z X Z I K X X I K B X Z I K B Z X I K B Z Z I K B L X Z I K L X I K B L Z I K B A X Z I K A X I K B A Z I K B
Line Criterion Arc Criterion Line Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Line Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Arc Criterion Angle Criterion Angle Criterion
Selestions of Solutions
Angle Criterion
F
MTS GmbH 1998
Priority of the Angle Criterion

If the two solutions have different angles as well as different lengths of line, the angle criterion must always be used in the selection.
177
G71G72 or G71G73
With Tangential Transition between Segments

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below the word O000 is programmed in the second NC block, to define the tangential transition. Pointed tangential transitions can only be programmed in the WOP mode if this option has been selected with the function key <F5>.
Line - Arc G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 Z I K B O000 A X B E O000 A Z B E O000 X I K B O000 X Z I K O000 A X Z B O000
Selction of Solutions
Arc Criterion
Tangent Criterion
Tangent Criterion Arc Criterion Tangent Criterion Arc Criterion
G71 X.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
G71 Z.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
In each case the angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
178
G71G72 or G71G73
G71 X.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
G71 X.. O001 or O002 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1 (shorter arcs), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arcs).
G71 Z.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
G71 Z.. O001 or O002 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) The angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
MTS GmbH 1998
179
G71G72 or G71G73
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
G71 L.. O001 or O002 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) The line criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
180
G71G72 or G71G73
Examples of Tangential Transitions
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. B.. O000 The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

When the WOP mode is operative, pointed tangential transitions may only be programmed if the appropriate option has been selected with the function key <F5>.
G71 O001 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) O000
G71 R+.. O002 O011 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) O000
MTS GmbH 1998
181
G71G72 or G71G73
G71 O001 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000
G71 R+.. O002 O011 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000
G71 O001 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000
G71 R+.. O002 O011 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000
182
Three-Point String: Arc - Arc
G72G72
6.9 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc G72G72 or G72G73 or G73G72 or G73G73

Two consecutive circular arcs can be programmed as a three-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string, the first arc is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequent NC block, describing the second arc. Optional Addresses As a first contour entity a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be defined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listed below must be programmed: I, K A, I A, K A, B Coordinates of the centre of the arc Starting angle and centre coordinate in X Starting angle and centre coordinate in Z Starting angle and radius
Optional Addresses: I1/K1 Centre coordinates of the first arc A Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the starting point P0 B1 Radius of the first arc I2/K2 Centre coordinates of the second arc Radius of the second arc B2 X/Z End point coordinates of the second arc E Angle to the positive Z-axis of the oriented tangent at the end point P2 O000 Tangential transition between segments
Number of solutions
Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in four, three, two, one or no solutions. When several solutions are possilbe the desired contour must be determined by entering O001 or O002. If absolute coordinates are entered for the centre of the circle, the address O070 must be programmed in the same NC block.
Programming Hints
MTS GmbH 1998
183
G72G72
To determine a three-point string consisting of two arcs, a total of six of the above addresses must be programmed.
Table of Available Three-Point Strings: Arc - Arc G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 I K X Z I K I K X I K B I K Z I K B
Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
With Tangential Transitions between Contour Segments

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below, the word O000 must be programmed in the second NC block to define the tangential transition.
Arc - Arc G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 I K X Z B O000 I K X B E O000 I K Z B E O000 A B X B E O000 A B Z B E O000
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
F
184
Note: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by the addresses A I, A K or A B instead of with the centre coordinates I K. This applies to all examples.
G72G72

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are however also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73). As a model, all combinations of G72 and G73 possible with the first example are shown in the diagrams below.
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G73 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)
G73 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G73 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) G73 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
185
G72G72
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002
In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc). 2nd arc: O001 is programmed to select P2-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).
Examples of Tangential Transitions
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 X.. Z.. B.. O000 In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
186
G72G72
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 X.. B.. E.. O000
G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002 G72 Z.. B.. E.. O000
In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to selected P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 A.. B.. O001 or O002 G72 X.. B.. E.. O000
G72 A.. B.. O001 or O002 G72 Z.. B.. E.. B.. O000 In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
187
Four-Point String
6.10 Four-Point String:with Tangential Transitions

Three contour segments (lines and arcs in any order) can be programmed as a four-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a four-point string, the first and second entity are not determined until the third segment is defined. Optional Addresses As a first segment of a contour, a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be defined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listed below must be programmed: I, K A, I A, K A, B Centre coordinates Starting angle and centre coordinate in X Starting angle and centre coordinate in Z Starting angle and radius
Optional Addresses: Angle of the line to the positive Zaxis Radius of the first arc B1 I/K Centre coordinates of the second arc Radius of the second arc B2 Z Coordinate of the end point of the second arc O000 Tangential transition between segments A
Diagram: Number of solutions
Line - Arc - Arc Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may not result in a single solution but in any number of sultions, from one to four. If several solutions are possible the arc criterion must be used to determine the desired contour, by entering O001 (smaller arc) or O002 (greater arc). If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address O070 must be programmed in the same NC block. With four-point strings the word O000 is programmed to define tangential transitions.
Programming Hints
188
Four-Point String
Table of Available Four-Point Strings with Tangential Transitions:

G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73
A B O000 X Z I K O000 A B O000 X I K B O000 A B O000 Z I K B O000 I K B O000 X Z I K O000 I K B O000 X I K B O000 I K B O000 Z I K B O000 I K B O000 I K O000 X Z I K O000 I K O000 X I K B O000 I K O000 Z I K B O000
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion Arc Criterion
Arc Criterion
X Z A O000
Tangent Criterion
Tangent Criterion Arc Criterion Tangent Criterion Arc Criterion
F
MTS GmbH 1998
G72/G73
Note: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by the addresses A I, A K or A B instead of with the centre coordinates I K. This applies to all examples. To avoid repetition, as a rule only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are however also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73) and to any combination of G72 and G73.
189
Examples of Contour Strings
Examples of Contour Strings with Alternative Solutions and Tangential Transitions
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G73 B.. O000 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O000 (O070) The arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to elect P1-2 (longer arc).
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G73 B.. O000 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. O000 (O070) O001 or O002
G71 A.. O001 or O002 G73 B.. O000 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. O000 (O070) O001 or O002
In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: 1st arc: O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc). 2nd arc: O001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).
190
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. P000 (P070) The arc criterion is used to select a solution: 2nd arc: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution: 2nd arc P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc). 3rd arc: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G71 X.. Z.. A.. P000 The arc criterion is used to select a solution: 2nd arc: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
191

Pointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if this option has been selected with the function key <F5>. If P002 (pointed tangential transition) is programmed in the first NC block, the selection of this solution will also apply to the second arc.
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 G71 P000 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (P070) P000
G72 I.. K.. (P070) R+.. P002 P011 G71 R+.. P011 P000 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (P070) P000
In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings.
192
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 G71 P000 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011 G71 R+.. P011 P000 G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings. In the third NC block (2nd arc) the arc criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 G71 P000 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011 G71 R+.. P011 P000 G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
n the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 P2-2)with roundings. In the third NC block (2nd arc) the arc criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).
MTS GmbH 1998
193
Open Contour Strings
6.11 Open Contour Strings

To describe contour strings of any number of entities as multiple-point strings, would result in an unlimited number of arc and line combinations with a corresponding variety of address combinations. Since only a limited number of examples can be described in this manual, the exemplification of strings of four points and longer has been confined to those with a tangential transition. To describe a contour string longer than four points we use the terms "open contour strings" and tangential connections. Definition An "open contour string" denotes a multiple-point string with all of its segments geometrically determined. Only the end point of the final entity remains undetermined. Consequently, this final segment of an open contour string must be either a half line or a full circle. The end point of this entity can only be determined by entering the next entity; it is then computed by the control system. The next multiple-point string is then linked-up, i.e. the last entity of the open contour string will be considered as the first entity of the new multiple-point string. An open contour string with a tangential transition is given, consisting of an arc and a line. The end point of the line remains undetermined (see Diagram 6.9.1). Subsequent entities are an arc (G73) with given radius and an arc (G72) with end point and centre. Based on the known starting point of the line P1 a four-point string with tangential transitions is established, including the line and both arcs (see Diagram 6.9.2).
Example
G72 I.. K.. P070 G71 A.. P000 G72 I.. K.. P070 G71 A.. P000 P001 G73 B.. P000 G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. P070 P000 Diagram 6.9.2 In this example, the open contour string could also be continued by programming G72 I.. K.. B.. Diagram 6.9.1
194
Optional Addresses: X/Z Coordinates of the end point of the line L Length of the line A Angle of the line to the positive Zaxis I/K Coordinates of the centre of the arc B Radius of the arc P000 Tangential transition between segments
Number of Solutions
Depending on the address values programmed, the computation of the contour may not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in four, three, two, one or no solutions. As a first segment of a contour, a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be defined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listed below must be programmed: I, K A, I A, K A, B Centre coordinates Starting angle and centre coordinate in X Starting angle and centre coordinate in Z Starting angle and radius
Optional Addresses
For reasons of clarity, only the centre coordinates (I and K) of arcs will be shown in the diagrams below. Programming Hints When alternative solutions occur, the desired contour must be determined by entering P001 or P002. If no particular solution is selected, the control system, will assume the first solution P001. If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address P070 must be programmed in the same NC block. To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73) as well.
MTS GmbH 1998
195
Table of Available Open Contour Strings: One Entity G71 G72/G73 Two Entities G72/G73 G71 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 Two Entities G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 I K P000 I K B P000 I K B P000 I K B P000 A B P000 I K B P000
Selection of Solutions A I K Selection of Solutions I K A P000 X I K B Z I K B A I K B L I K B

Tangent Criterion Angle Criterion Line Criterion Angle Criterion Angle Criterion Tangent Criterion
I K B P000 I K I K B Selection of Solutions

Tangent Criterion Arc Criterion
F
196
Note: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by the addresses A I, A K or A B, instead of by the centre coordinates I K. This applies to all examples.
G71 X.. P001 or P002 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)
G71 Z.. P001 or P002 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)
The angle criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
G71 A.. P001 or P002 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) In the first block G71 : The line criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).
G71 L.. P001 or P002 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) The angle criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).
MTS GmbH 1998
197
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) The arc criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)
G71 A.. P001 or P002 G73 B.. P000 G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070) The arc criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), . P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
198

Pointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if this option has been selected with the function key <F5>.
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 G71 A.. P000
G72 I.. K.. (P070) R+.. P002 P011 G71 A.. P000
The tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding
G71 P001 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) P000
G71 R+.. P002 P011 G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) P000
The tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding
MTS GmbH 1998
199
G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 G71 P000 G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)
G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011 G71 R+.. P011 P000 G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)
In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution: P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings. If P002 (pointed tangential transition) is programmed in the first NC block, this selection will also be applied to the second arc.
200
Tangential Connection
6.12 Tangential Connection

As a rule two addresses must be programmed to define a line, three addresses to define an arc (see the description of two-point strings in Sections 6.2 and 6.3). However if a contour segment is connected to the previous segment by a tangential transition, one address will be sufficient to determine a line and two addresses to determine an arc. Cross Reference For more detailed instructions concerning tangential transitions between contour segments, see Section 6.1.2 "Tangential Transitions".
Optional Addresses: Line: X/Z L Coordinates of the end point of the line Length of the line
Arc: X/Z I/K B Coordinates of the end point of the arc Coordinates of the centre of the arc Radius of the arc
To program a tangential transition between two contour segments, the address P000 is entered in the second NC block. This address is equivalent to the starting angle A, which must not be programmed. Programming Hints If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address P070 must be programmed in the same NC block. To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given are also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).
MTS GmbH 1998
201
Examples of Contour Strings with Tangential Connection Selection of Solutions G71 G71 G71 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 G72/G73 X P000 Z P000 L P000 X Z P000 X I P000 X K P000 Z I P000 Z K P000 X B P000 Z B P000
Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion Arc Criterion
G72 X.. I.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 X.. K.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
The arc criterion is used to select a solution: P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).
202
G72 Z.. I.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 Z.. K.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002
G72 X.. B.. P000 P001 or P002
G72 Z.. B.. P000 P001 or P002
MTS GmbH 1998
203
Parameters
Assignment of Parameter Values: N020 P01=-080.000 N025 P02=+015.000 N030 P03=+001.000 N035 P04=+040.000 N040 P05=-030.000 N045 P06=+006.000 N050 P07=+001.500 N055 P08=+070.000 N060 P09=+001.000 N065 P10=-070.000 N070 P11=+095.000 N075 P12=+001.500 N080 P13=+006.000 N085 P14=+000.920 N090 P15=+030.000
Diagram 7.1:
Assignment of parameter values
Diagram 7.2:
NC program, parameter programming
204
Parameters
7 Parameters
In the MTS Programming Code, parameters are generally programmed at the address P. A total of 100 registers "P00" to "P99" are available to the user.
Assignment of a Parameter Value

To assign a value to a parameter, the identification letter P and the number of the register are entered. The assignation sign ("=" as a rule) will be set automatically by the editor. The value which is to be assigned to this register must then be entered. Example N120 P20= +100.000 The default parameter address and assignation sign may be edited in the configuration program (e.g. for use with other programming codes). Note: this kind of modification should be effected only if a format file containing has been created, the applicable parameter entries, or if the NC Editor is operating in the free format mode. In the free format mode an option is provided to assign a complete command (e.g. N20 P200= G0 X100) to a parameter register. The free format mode provides access to 32000 parameter registers. The assignement of a value to a parameter must be programmed either as a separate NC block or at the end of a block.
F
Example
Programming with Parameters

To program parameters within an NC block, enter, the identification letter, followed by the applicable parameter number after the address. N475 P01 = +020.000 P02 = +030.000
N485 G00 XP01 ZP02 In line with the value programmed in block N475 the tool will be moved in X to the value +20 and in Z to +30 when block 475 is executed. If, in the free format mode, a command has been assigned to a parameter, there is no need to program an address to invoke it. Example N20 P200= G0 X100
N140 P200 Rapid positioning of the tool at X +100. Cross-Reference Please see the Operation Manual of the CNC Simulator for Turning for detailed instructions concerning the configuration and operation of the free format mode.
MTS GmbH 1998
205
Programming with Special Characters
Diagram 8.1:
NC blocks N140, N150 and N235 contain comments.
206
8 Programming with Special Characters 8.1 Comments

To keep the structure of a generated NC program clear and intelligible, explanations and comments concerning specific NC blocks or program parts may be included in the program itself. Comments must be flagged by special characters to make them distinguishable from the program blocks. The flagged parts will be identified by control system and skipped accordingly during program execution. ( Example The comment character "(" (opening parenthesis) can be used to explain specific steps in the program run, such as G-commands and cycles.
N020 P01=-080.000 ( DRILLING DEPTH ... N150 F000.200 S0450 T0404 M04 (LEFT HAND CORNER TOOL ALT/506 The comment character may be inserted directly after a command or on the next line, depending on the length of the text to be entered. Removing the comment sign will delete the whole line/comment.
8.2 Skipping of NC blocks

: Example The special character ":" (colon) serves to temporarily omit NC blocks, e.g. for test purposes. The blocks indicated will be skipped in the program execution.
N210 G00 Z-017.000 N215 G00 X+046.000 N220 : G78 X+044.000 Z-025.000 I+002.000 K+005.000 N225 G78 X+044.000 Z-025.000 I+001.800 K+006.500 N230 G01 X+062.000 : Z-020.000 In this case the NC block N220 and the address Z-020.000 in block N230 will be skipped in the program execution. Unlike the parenthesis sign preceding a comment, the colon can be removed without deleting the line: only the special character will disappear and the NC block will be re-integrated into the program run.
MTS GmbH 1998
207
Diagram 8.2:
Because of the arithmetic operations included in the NC blocks N270 and N300 these have been programmed in the "Temporary Free Format Mode".
208
Arithmetic Operations
8.3 Temporary Free Format

If the user wishes to dispense with syntax checking, automatic formatting etc., the free format mode is the option to choose for NC Programming. In this programming mode there are no limitations to entering characters and character strings. The free format mode can either be activated from the configuration program (to apply to an NC program in general), or by entering the character ")" (to apply to specific program lines). (See Ch. 7 of the CNC Simulator Operation Manual for a detailed description of the MTS Format and the Free Format Mode.) ) The character ")" (closing parentheses) activates the free format mode for the selected program line. As with the comment character (see above), any sequence of characters (including blanks) can be entered after the special character. All entries will take effect in the program run, while no syntax checking is applied. It is advisable to make sure that your entries are logical and interpretable!
Example
N270 ) G00 XP04+1 Z+001.000 The option of activating the free format mode in each selected program line can be used for condensed input of NC blocks as well as to include arithmetic operations in the programming:
8.4 Arithmetic Operations

In an NC program, a calculation may be specified as an arithmetic operation (e.g. XP1+1) or as a functional equation (e.g. P4=P1*P2). In both cases, the algebraic rules (e.g. 'priority of multiplication and division', 'priority of operations in brackets'), addition theoremes, rules of calculation with powers and logarithmic calculation etc. must be observed. The following operations can be programmed: Addition + To effect an addition, the sign "+" (plus) must be programmed: (=> X = P04 + 1)
N270 ) G00 XP04+1 Z+001.000 Subtraction -
To effect a subtraction, the sign "-" (minus) must be programmed:
N445 ) P16 = P04 - P02 Multiplication * To effect a multiplication, the sign "*" (asterisk) must be programmed: (=> Z = 2 * P03)
N320 ) G01 X P04 Z 2 * P03 Division /
To effect a division, the sign "/" (slash) must be programmed: (=> Z = 4 / P03)
N320 ) G01 X P04 Z 4 / P03
MTS GmbH 1998
209
Arithmetic Operations Statement of Operational Signs + By specifying a + (plus) or - (minus) sign, an entered value can be interpreted as a real number, with up to three places after the decimal point. Values that have no sign will be interpreted as positive numbers.:
N330 ) P1 = -005.500 N340 ) P2 = P1 + P1
Brackets []
P2 = - 011.000 In addition to the operations described above, brackets can be used. The applicable characters are "[" (opening bracket) and "]" (closing bracket).
N260 ) G01 X [P1 + P2] * 2 Absolute Value ABS To enter a number as an absolute value, the character string "ABS" must be programmed prior to that number. This may serve to exclude negative values: N330 ) P1 = -005.500 N350 ) P2 = ABS [+004.500 + P1]
Integer Value INT
P2 = 001.000 If, in the course of an arithmetic operation, only the numbers before the decimal point should be taken into account, the character string "INT" must be programmed prior to the respective value: ) P1 = +010.000 ) P2 = -001.500 ) P1 = INT [P1 + P2] ) G23 P450 Q470 S3
N445 N450 N455 ... N480
P1' = 008.000, P1'' = 006.000, P1''' = 004.000 During the first execution of the program part repetition P1 is set to the value 8, in the second execution it is set to 6 and in the third to 4. "Modulo" Value % "Modulo" is the term for the remainder of a division calculation, when the result is to be a value of integer numbers e.g.: 5/2=2 4 _____ 1 (modulo-value) The division sign for modulo calculation is "%" (percentage) , e.g. 5 modulo 2: 5 % 2 N550 ) P1 = +010.000 % +003.000
210
P1 = 001.000
Sine
SIN
The sine function applies to right-angled triangles and is established by the function "opposite cathetus/hypotenuse". The character string "SIN" must be programmed prior to entering a sine value in angular degrees.:
N400 ) P16 = SIN P15 * P03 Cosine COS The cosine function applies to right-angled triangles and is established by the function "adjacent cathetus/hypotenuse". The character string "COS" must be programmed prior to entering a cosine value in angular degrees.: N405 ) P16 = COS [90 - P15] * P03 Tangent TAN The tangent function applies to right-angled triangles and is established by the function "opposite cathetus/adjacent cathetus". The character string "TAN" must be programmed prior to entering a tangent value in angular degrees: N410 ) P17 = TAN P15 * P03 Arc Tangent ATAN The arc tangent function applies to right-angled triangles, it establishes the included angle of the adjacent cathetus and hypotenuse. This functional equation is the inverse function of the tangent: "opposite cathetus/adjacent cathetus". The character string "ATAN" must be entered to program the arc tangent, which will be calculated in angular degrees: N420 ) P15 = ATAN P17 / P03 Square Root SQRTTo program the square root function, the character string "SQRT" is entered : N320 ) P16 = SQRT +025.000
Exponential Function
P16 = 005.000
EXP This exponential function, programmed by the character string EXP, is based on "Euler's constant" (e = 2,71828...); it serves to calculate the ex. value for each case. N820 ) P20 = EXP +003.000
Natural Logarithm
LN
As the inverse to the above exponential function, programming "LN" serves to calculate the logarithm to the base e :
F
MTS GmbH 1998
N830 ) P21 = LN P20 Note: when applying arithmetical operations or programming parameters, the entered values or intended functions must "make sense" in the overall context of the NC programming. If the arithmetical operations prove invalid, a corresponding error message with the suffix "operation error..." will appear (cf. CNC Simulator Operating Manual).
211
Calculating a Chamfer: Z2 => Z1 - P03 X2 => P04 Z1 = 000.000 X1 => P04 - 2 * P03 / TAN P15
Diagram 8.3:
Applying a trigonometric function in the programming of a chamfer. If a general case is given, the Z1-value can also be parametricised.
Diagram 8.4:
Programming with parameters and application of arithmetic operations.
212
8.5 Example of Programming with Parameters and Arithmetic Operations

In diagrams 7.2, 8.1 and 8.2, parameter programmed lines of NC programs are listed, namely the deep drilling cyle (N140), the cross turning cycle (N165), the roughing cycle (N180 - N225), the roughing cycle in compliance with DIN 76 (N275) and the thread cutting cycle (N300). Each of these cutting cycles can easily be modified by setting different parameters. With the roughing cycle a trigonometric function has been applied to describe the chamfer in a generalized form. This special type of programming is advisable in the given case, because the chamfer angle depends on the lead. In the following, a short explanation is given of the arithmetic operations applied. Parameters relevant to the programming of the chamfer are the following: P03: Length of the chamfer P04: Diameter at the chamfer end point P15: Chamfer angle The contour is described by determining two contour points: First the cross turning is executed, up to the point where the chamfer is to begin. The part diameter at this point can easily be calculated by applying the tangent function(see Diagr.): N190 ) G01 X [P04 - 2 * P03 / TANP15] Note: dx = X2 - X1 relates to the diameter. The value of the adjacent cathetus in the tangent function must therefore be doubled. 1. 2. As a next step the end point of the chamfer must be defined: N195 ) G01 XP04 Z-P03 Note: this contour description is based on Z1 = 000.000. If the user wishes to define a generally valid function, Z1 can be programmed as a parameter.
Parametricized cutting cycles can be used as macros for other NC programs. Note: If you choose to use macros as subprograms, make sure you do not program any jump instructions or program part repetitions.
MTS GmbH 1998
213
Setup Form
Diagram 9.1 :
Setup form; programming of data for the automatic setup of the machine tool.
214
Setup Form
9 Setup Form 9.1 Preface

The setup form lists all data necessary for the automatic setup of a machine tool when an NC program is started, as defined in the Simulator configuration. This data includes the following: Blank-/part geometry Clamping devices and clamping mode Tools in the turret and current tool Offset values of the tools employed
Setup forms describing the status of the machine at any time can be created automatically or manually. Each setup form is listed before the NC program to which it applies and is distinctly separated from the actual program lines. It is also possible to create and manage an NC program bound to a specific set of setup data. If the setup form interpreter (see CNC Simulator Operating Manual) is selected, the CNC Simulator will automatically be set up according to the specified setup data, each time the respective NC program is loaded in the automatic or in the interactive programming mode. If the user wishes to include the setup of a specific machine status in the start-up routine of the CNC Simulator itself, the name of the NC program to which that setup applies, must be specified in the configuration program. In cases where a setup form and a status file have been specified in the configuration, the Simulator will be set up according to the status file. The setup form function considerably speeds up programming, because specific NC programs can be repeatedly edited without the need to re-program the Simulator setup for each work session. At the same time the setup form serves to document the machine status, which can then be verified and edited at any time. As an additional data backup, we recommend that the user make printed copies of the NC programs generated. Note Note: When a setup form documenting a specific machine status is generated automatically, it will be included in the current NC program without a security prompt. If the selected NC program already has a setup form prefixed to it, this will be overwritten without further dialogue. When manually creating or editing a setup form, it is important to check on the valid input of words, parameters and values. Invalid keywords will be ignored and missing parameters will be set to zero. Trouble-free execution of a program is guaranteed only if there are no errors with value input and spelling. If specific data is missing or wronly entered, as a rule the respective data from the previous definition of the machine status will normally be entered.
MTS GmbH 1998
215
Setup Form () (( 26.6.1998 08:20 ( ( CONFIGURATION ( MACHINE MTS TC-DRT-CSP-042-0400x2000 ( CONTROL MTS TC DRT CSP CONTROL ( ( PART ( CYLINDER D060.000 L112.000 ( MATERIAL C 45 W-Nr: 1.0503 ( DENSITY 007.90 ( ( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART ( CHUCK KFD-HS 130 ( STEP JAW HM-110_130-02.001 ( TYPE OF CHUCK EXTERNAL CHUCK OUTSIDE STEP JAW ( CHUCKING DEPTH E18.000 (( Right side of the part: Z+222.000 ( ( COUNTER SPINDLE WITHOUT WORKPART ( CHUCK KFD-HS 160 ( STEP JAW HM-160_200-01.001 ( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+1000.000 ( ( CURRENT TOOL T01 ( TOOLS ( T01 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SCLCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30 ( T02 CENTER DRILL CD-04.00/056/R/HSS ISO30 ( T03 TWIST DRILL DR-10.00/087/R/HSS ISO30 ( T04 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30 ( T05 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SVJCL-2020/L/1604 ISO30 ( T06 RECESSING TOOL ER-SGTFL-2012/L/02.4-0 ISO30 ( T07 LEFT THREADING TOOL TL-LHTR-2020/R/60/3.00 ISO30 ( T08-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SCLCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30 ( T09-R REVERSIBLE TIP DRL DI-26.00/059/R/HMT ISO30 ( T10-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNL-2020/L/1604 ISO30 ( T11-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNL-2020/L/1604 ISO30 ( T12-R INSIDE TURNING TOOL POST BI-SDQCL-1212/L/0704 ISO30 ( T13-R INTERN. THREADING TOOL POSTAX. TI-ITTR-2016/R/60/2.50 ISO30 ( T14 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SVJCL-2020/L/1604 ISO30 ( T15-R TWIST DRILL DR-14.00/065/R/HSS ISO30 ( T16 LEFT THREADING TOOL TL-LHTR-2020/R/60/3.00 ISO30 ( ( TOOL COMPENSATION ( D01 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E005.000 I-000.400 K-000.400 ( D02 R000.000 X+062.000 Z+070.000 G004.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000 ( D03 R000.000 X+062.000 Z+129.000 G010.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000 ( D04 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E032.000 I-000.400 K-000.400 ( D05 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E052.000 I-000.400 K-000.400 ( D06 R000.160 X+095.000 Z+038.700 G002.400 E000.000 I-000.160 K-000.160 ( D07 R000.433 X+105.000 Z+037.067 G000.000 E000.000 I-000.433 K+000.000 ( D08 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E005.000 I-000.400 K+000.400 ( D09 R000.000 X+065.000 Z-115.000 G026.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000 ( D10 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E027.000 I-000.400 K+000.400 ( D11 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E027.000 I-000.400 K+000.400 ( D12 R000.400 X+056.224 Z-120.000 G000.000 E017.500 I+000.400 K+000.400 ( D13 R000.361 X+051.439 Z-120.000 G000.000 E000.000 I+000.361 K+000.000 ( D14 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E052.000 I-000.400 K-000.400 ( D15 R000.000 X+062.000 Z-112.000 G014.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000 ( D16 R000.433 X+105.000 Z+037.067 G000.000 E000.000 I-000.433 K+000.000 ( () Diagram 9.2 : Setup data of an NC program
216
Setup Form
9.2 Syntax of the Setup Form

As with the generation of an NC program, the setup data is programmed using the NC- editor or the interactive programming mode. By an appropriate default entry in the Simulator control configuration, the setup form data can be protected against manual editing. This may be recommendable e.g. for training purposes. If manual entry or editing of setup form data is desired, certain conventions concerning the programming language ("syntax rules") must be observed to ensure correct interpretation. The diagram on the previous page shows an example: the setup form of an NC program. Beginning and End Indicator: Line Start Indicator Break Character Keywords The beginning and end of the setup form must be indicated by the character string "()" Deleting one of these indicators may lead to problems in the program run. The character "(" - otherwise used to denote a comment - must be entered at the beginning of each new line. Different entries within the same line must be separated by at least one blank character. A number of pre-defined "keywords" can be used with the entry of setup data, serving to denote that element of the machining space to which the subsequent information relates. These keywords are given and explained in further detail on the following pages. e.g.: ( CYLINDER D60 L112 The character"(" indicates the beginning of a new line and the character string "CYLINDER" is the keyword for the definition of a blank. Parameters After the keyword has been entered, the appropriate elements can be specified either by input of dimensions or by entering object or file names. e.g.: ( T04 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30 The corner tool identified by " CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30" is mounted to the turret position "T04" . Groups of Elements For the sake of clarity, all entries relating to a common technical context will be arranged in "groups". The grouping has a binding effect and must therefore be observed in the subsequent programming. : e.g.: (MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART ( CHUCK KFD-HS 130 ( STEP JAW HM-110_130-02.001 ( TYPE OF CHUCK EXTERNAL CHUCK OUTSIDE STEP JAW ( CHUCKING DEPTH E18.000
Comments
To include comments in the setup form, another opening parenthesis "("must be entered to indicate the beginning of the comment text. Specific comments - e.g. "right face of the workpiece : ..." - will be set automatically when a setup form is representing a current machine status is created. In cases where the character "(" is also used to name an element, the character should be entered twice to make sure it will not be interpreted as a comment character. Example.: Chuck Name : "SP5(120" -> Setup form: ( LATHE CHUCK SP5((120
MTS GmbH 1998
217
Setup Form
9.3 Setup Data: Beginning/End Indicator

Function NC Block The beginning and end of the setup form is indicated by the character string "()" (opening/closing parenthesis)
() ... ()
The character strings indicating the beginning and end of the setup form must be programmed to ensure trouble-free program execution.
Note
9.4 Setup Data: Configuration Files

Function For the sake of clarity the activated machine and control configuration files can be specified in the setup form. This will facilitate the selection of the appropriate configuration with later test runs of the NC program.
NC Block
( CONFIGURATION ( MACHINE [FILENAME1] ( CONTROL [FILENAME2]

[FILENAME1] [FILENAME2] Name of the machine configuration file Name of the control configuration file
Addresses
Note
Configuration files cannot be read-in while the CNC Simulator is switched on; it is therefore of no importance for the program run, whether such files have been specified in the setup form. To edit the configuration, machining must be interrupted and the desired configuration files identified in the selection menu. ( CONFIGURATION ( ( MACHINE CONTROL MTS TC-DRT-CSP-042-0400x2000 MTS TC DRT CSP CONTROL
Example
218
Setup Form
9.5 Setup Data: Blank

Function Blanks can be cylindrical core pieces (cylinder, cylinder with chamfer) or tubes (tube, tube with chamfer). Furthermore it is possible to overlap each rotation symmetrical raw part geometry additionally with a polygon as an outside contour. The polygon is specified with the number N for corners and with the width over the flats D. Based on these data and on the quantity theory the raw part is created as an average of the cylinder/tube with the N-polygon. NC Block
( CYLINDER D... L... ( CYLINDER WITH CENTRE HOLE D... L... WS... WF... DS... DF... ( TUBE D... L... I... ( CHAMFERED TUBE D... L... I... WS... WF... DS... DF... ( N-POLYGON N006 D050.000
D L I WS WF DS DF N Diameter of cylinder or tube respectively the width of each side of the N- polygon Length of cylinder or tube Internal diameter of tube Angle of chamfer at face end Angle of chamfer at chucked end Diameter of chamfer at face end Diameter of chamfer at chucked end Number of corners of the N-polygon
Addresses
Programming Example: ( CHAMFERED TUBE D+170.000 L+170.000 I+080.000 WS+090.000 WF+090.000 DS+100.000 DF+100.000 Setting up work part : chamfered tube
Note
The values entered must only relate to one type of blank at a time. Parameters not entered will automatically be set to zero.
MTS GmbH 1998
219
Setup Form
Programming Example: ( N-KANT N006 D050.000 N-polygon Clarification: N = number of corners D = width of each side
If N is an even number then: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of two opposite areas. If N is an uneven number then: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of one side to the opposite area. Setting up work part: N-polygon
3D view: demonstration of the N-sided polygon specified as a blank
220
Setup Form
9.6 Setup Data: Prefabricated Part

Function Instead of a blank, a prefabricated part may be inserted. This can be specified in the setup form either by entering the keyword "Blank Geometry" and subsequently describing an NC program in compliance with DIN 66025 including the G-commands "G00", G01", "G02" or "G03" (all specified in the setup form), or - if there is already a workpiece file - by entering the keyword "Blank Filename" and subsequently specifying the file name.
NC Block
( BLANK GEOMETRY ( BLANK FILENAME

[NC program] [Filename.DWS]
[NC program] [FILENAME.DWS]
Addresses
After the keyword the geometry is described as an NC program in compliance with DIN 66025 (closed contour, 1st block: Feed adjustm. at "G00" or "G01"). Name of the workpiece file
Programming Example: ( BLANK GEOMETRY X+000.000Z+270.000 ( G01 X+120.000 Z+270.000 ( G01 X+130.000 Z+260.000 ( G01 X+130.000 Z+170.000 ( G02 X+170.000 Z+155.000 I+000.000 K+015.000 ( G01 X+170.000 Z+60.000 ( G01 X+000.000 Z+060.000 ( G01 X+000.000 Z+270.000 ( M30 Setting up work part : prefabricated part
Setup Data: Workpiece Material

Function After the keyword "material" the desired type of workpiece material can be entered. In addition to the information on the raw material of the work part to be machined also the material density can be entered. This value corresponds to the specific material weight and is internally used in the NC program analysis for the calculation of the milled mass.
NC Block
( MATERIAL [type of the selected material] ( DENSITY [density of the selected material]
( ( MATERIAL C 45 W-Nr: 1.0503 DENSITY 007.90
Example
MTS GmbH 1998
221
Setup Form
9.7 Setup Data: Clamping Devices

Function The clamping device management of the Simulator for Turning provides the means to define and manage lathe chucks, step jaws, lathe centres, face drivers, collets and sleeves. To select of one of the available elements, the desired (and, of course, matching) elements must be entered under the group name "clamping devices":
NC Block
( CLAMPING DEVICES ( LATHE CHUCK [Chuck] ( STEP JAW [Set of jaws] ( SLEEVE TIP [Sleeve tip] ( FACE DRIVER [Face driver] ( COLLET CHUCK [Collet chuck) ( COLLET [Collet]
[Chuck] [Set of jaws] [Sleeve tip] [Face driver] [Collet chuck] [Collet] Name of the lathe chuck ame of the step jaws Name of the sleeve tip Name of the face driver Name of the collet chuck Name of the collet
Addresses
Note
Only matching clamping elements can be specified. See clamping device management for the correct names of the clamping elements.
Setting-up: Clamping selection
222
Setup Form
Clamping on counter spindle Setting-up: Clamping on the main and counter spindle
If the turning machine is configured for counter spindle it is possible to select a corresponding clamping device and to use the counter spindle.
9.8 Setup Data: Clamping Mode

Function NC Block The clamping mode (the way the step jaws are used to chuck the workpiece) is entered under the group name "Clamping Mode".
( CLAMPING MODE ( CLAMPING MODE ( CLAMPING MODE ( CLAMPING MODE
EXT. CLAMPING EXT. STEPPED JAWS EXT. CLAMPING INT. STEPPED JAWS INT. CLAMPING EXT. STEPPED JAWS INT. CLAMPING INT. STEPPED JAWS
Addresses
"External clamping" or "internal clamping" denotes the selected type of clamping. "External stepped jaws" or "internal stepped jaws" defines the way of applying the stepped jaws. Keywords have no parameters.
Note
The clamping mode must be consistent with the blank/workpiece geometry. If no clamping mode is defined, the default mode will be external clamping with externally stepped jaws. If a clamping mode has been defined and "turning between centres" has been selected as the clamping device, the entry concerning the clamping mode will be ignored.
MTS GmbH 1998
223
Setup Form
9.9 Setup Data: Tailstock/Sleeve

Function NC Block Addresses Note Additionally a tailstock can be defined, on condition that this option has been provided for in the CNC Simulator Configuration.
( TAILSTOCK POSITION Z...

Z After the keyword "tailstock" the position of the tailstock in Z must be entered.
Check on possible collisions. The turret will be moved to the reference point in the automatic setup procedure.
9.10 Setup Data: Chucking Depth

Function NC Block Addresses The final parameter for definition of the clamping is the chucking depth.
( CHUCKING DEPTH E...

E Chucking depth in Z
Programming Example: ... ( CHUCKING DEPTH E+028.000 ...
Note
To facilitate the programming of the workpiece zero, the Z-value of the front face will be indicated as a comment when a setup form is generated automatically.
224
Setup Form
9.11 Setup Data: Counter Spindle

With the additional option to install a counter spindle on a CNC machine tool it was necessary to extend the set-up sheet information. 2 work parts In the set-up sheet it is possible to store information on two work parts. Also the information which of the work parts is chucked on each spindle is stored in the setup sheet. Set-up sheet of a turning machine with counter spindle and two work parts. ... ( PART 1 ( CYLINDER D020.000 L072.400 ( MATERIAL C 45 W.-No 1.0503 ( ( PART 2 ( GEOMETRY X+000.000 Z+435.200 ( G01 X+020.000 Z+435.200 ( G01 X+020.000 Z+441.588 ( G03 X+019.700 Z+441.900 I+000.250 K+000.312 ... ( G01 X+000.000 Z+435.200 ( M30 ( MATERIAL C 45 W.-No 1.0503 ( ( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART 1 ( COLLET CHUCK BO-HS ( COLLET BO-BC32-20 ( CHUCKING DEPTH E54.700 (( Right side of the part: Z+017.700 ( ( COUNTER SPINDLE WITH WORKPART 2 ( COLLET CHUCK BO-GS ( COLLET BO-BC32-14 ( CHUCKING DEPTH E9.500 ( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+423.000 (( Left workpart surface: Z+416.200 ...
Example 1 definition of the first work part defintition of the second work part
clamping the first work part in the main spindle
clamping the second work part in the counter spindle
Example 2
Set-up sheet of a turning machine with counter spindle and one work part. ... definition of the ( PART work part ( CYLINDER D025.000 L162.400 ( MATERIAL ::Messing ( DENSITY 008.70 ( ( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART ( COLLET CHUCK CCPO-KSPF-48 ( COLLET POCC-171E-22 ( CHUCKING DEPTH E81.000 (( Right side of the part: Z+172.000 ( ( COUNTER SPINDLE WITHOUT WORKPART ( COLLET CHUCK CCPO-KSPF-48 ( COLLET POCC-171E-22 ( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+1000.000 ...
clamping the work part in the main spindle
no work part in the counter spindle
MTS GmbH 1998
225
Setup Form
9.12 Setup Data: Current Tool

Function NC Block Addresses Note This entry serves to program a selected tool in the turret to be moved to the working position. Prior to this the turret is positioned at the reference point.
( CURRENT TOOL
T
T..
Specification of the selected tool in the turret (two-digit, e.g. "T09")
It is essential to make sure that moving the selected tool to the working position will not cause a collision.
9.13 Setup Data: Tools in the Turret

Function The selection of tools to be mounted in the turret is determined by entering, under the group name "Tools", the two-digit position numbers, the keywords of tool types and the tool names. ( TOOLS ( T.. RIGHT CORNER TOOL ( T.. LEFT CORNER TOOL ( T.. COPYING TOOL ( T.. ROUND HORIZONTAL ( T.. INSIDE TURNING TOOL POST ( T.. INSIDE TURNING TOOL PRE ( T.. INSIDE RECESSING TOOL PREAXI. ( T.. INSIDE RECESSING TOOL POSTAXI. ( T.. FRONT GROOVING TOOL ( T.. RECESSING TOOL ( T.. RH THREADING TOOL ( T.. LEFT THREADING TOOL ( T.. TWIST DRILL ( T.. CENTER DRILL ( T.. REVERSIBLE TIP DRL ( T.. INTERN THREADING TOOL PREAXI. ( T.. INTERN THREADING TOOL POSTAX. ( T.. SPECIAL TOOL. ( T.. EMPTY [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name]] [Tool name] [Tool name] [Tool name [Tool name]
NC Block
Addresses
T Specification of the selected tool in the turret (two-digit, e.g. "T09") The appropriate "tool name" can be found under "tool management"..
Note
Only tools that are included in the tool management can be specified. If a tool type keyword has been spelled incorrectly no new tools can be mounted. If the tool name is invalid, a corresponding error message will appear.
226
Setup Form
9.14 Setup Data: Driven Tools

Driven tools for horizontal and vertical milling operations If a turning machine has been configured for driven tools the turret and the tool management function are correspondingly extended to allow horizontal and vertical milling tools. When using driven tools it is possible to select milling tools out of the following machining groups: End mill Slot milling tool T-slot cutter Radius cutter Reamer Tap Drill Core drill
The individual tools of the above groups can be used either vertically or horizontally in the turret. This definition is made in set-up mode under the menu item for equipping the turret. CNC simulator turning version 6 offers new tool adaptation possibilities for turning and for driven tools especially for the use of the counter spindle. In case of this type of turret the tool carrier reference points are located on the turret surface. For tool equipping special tool adapters are available. If the turning machine is configured for counter spindle the user can define the use of the tools for machining on the main or counter spindle, after the turret has been equipped. This definition is done with the menu item Turn the tool in the main menu of equipping the turret. Herewith the current tool is turned 180 and used in the turret. Setting-up: Equipping the turret with driven tools
MTS GmbH 1998
227
Setup Form
Additional identification of tool application in set-up sheet
Next to the information on turret position equipping the set-up sheet contains additional identifications on the application of the tool. These identifications each have a different meaning: -R -V This letter indicates that a turning tool or a horizontal milling tool is installed in the tool turret, turned 180, for machining on counter spindle. This letter indicates that a milling tool is used for vertical machining irrespective of the fact if machining takes place on the main or counter spindle.
Based on the additional identifications for the tool application the following set-up sheet alternatives are possible: Example 1 ( T06 SLOT MILLING TOOL MS-10.0/022K/HSS ISO 1641
Clarification: Milling tool without identification = horizontal clamping for machining on the main spindle Example 2 ( T08-R SLOT MILLING TOOL MS-14.0/053L/HSS ISO 1641
Clarification: Milling tool with identification R = horizontal clamping for machining on the counter spindle Example 3 ( T07-V RADIUS CUTTER RC-03/01.5/05/HSS ISO1641
Clarification: Milling tool with identification V = vertical clamping for machining on the main and counter spindle Example 4 ( T02 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNR-2020/R/1604 ISO30
Clarification: Turning tool without identification = machining on the main spindle Example 5 ( T04-R RIGHT CORNER TOOL CR- MSBNL-2020/R/1204 ISO30
Clarification: Turning tool with identification R = machining on the counter spindle
228
Setup Form Compensation values for Left Corner Tool and Axial Reccessing Tool:
Setup Form, Compensation Values for Tools in the Turret:
MTS GmbH 1998
229
Setup Form
9.15 Setup Data: Compensation Values

Function The compensation values of the active tools may be automatically read in from the tool management or the offset value registers may be "manually" defined by the user, by entering the keyword "compensation values" followed by the compensation values. ( VALID COMPENSATION VALUES ( COMPENSATION VALUES ( D.. R... X... Z... G... E... I... K... Addresses The keyword "Valid Compensation Values" is entered without parameters. This effects the setting of the default compensation values to the appropriate registers, denoted by numbers corresponding to the turret position numbers, e.g. the offset values for "T01" are stored in the register "01" etc.
NC Block
Denotation Parameter Number of register Tool nose radius Coordinates of the theoretical tool tip relative to the tool reference point Max. width of recessing tool or diameter of drill Plan angle of external and internal tools Tool nose compensation vector 1 G All other tools: G=000.000 E All other tools: E=000.000 I and K Drills: =000.000 D (Two-digit:01-16) R Drills: R=000.000 X and Z
Note
For a detailed description of the definition of compensation values, see the Operating Manual of the CNC Simulator.
230
NC Program Analysis
10 NC Program Analysis
The NC program analysis is a comfortable tool for the technological and economical analysis of rotation symmetrical machining within NC programs. For each tool applied in the simulation it calculates the corresponding machining of the work part in form of a travel path representation including a table with the corresponding technological data. With reference to each tool and to the corresponding machining the following information is calculated for each machining process: Select NC program analysis machining process (commentary in NC program) tool position in turret minimum and maximum infeed of cutting point resulting from infeed number of rotations (minimum and maximum) cutting speed (minimum and maximum) infeed (minimum and maximum) length of travel path with infeed speed traversing time with infeed speed traversing time in rapid speed tool changing time cut material volume sum of the calculated times
The NC program analysis is started in the main menu of the automatic mode by selecting the menu item calculate NC data after you have entered the name of the NC program to be analyzed After the NC program is run the user can enter additional information, for instance, name of the customer, of the part, special tool description among other things. This information can be displayed on the screen together with the graphical representation of the machining and of the technology data. It can also be printed out page by page. When for instance the following message: N100 T0404 ( STRAIGHT ROUGHING OUTSIDE has been included as a comment after the tool change this comment is displayed in abbreviated form in the table with other analyzed technology information during the graphical representation of the machining process. It is also possible to include the technology information (without graphics) into the corresponding NC program. It then appears as a comment at the end of the analyzed NC program.
MTS GmbH 1998
231
NC Program Analysis
Result of the NC program analysis: travel path indication with the individual machining processes (part 1)
Result of the NC program analysis: travel path indication with the individual machining processes (part 2)
Result of the NC program analysis: table of overview with technological information
Result of the NC program analysis
232
3D-View
11 3D-View
The performance of the 3D view of the CNC simulator turning 6 has been considerably extended and offers now almost unlimited possibilities for threedimensional viewing of the work part. The 3D view can be called at any time of the CNC simulation and it always shows the current machining situation. Within the 3D menu the view can be changed with the following functions: 3D menu: Adjusting the viewing angle 3D view: 3D menu for the selection of the 3D view Rotation of the work part in the X axis (each step 5) Inclination of the work part in the Y axis (each step 5) Rotation of the work part in the Z axis = location of the C axis (each step 1) Zoom Viewing distance from the work part (far away, close viewing point)
3D-Interface: Adjusting the viewing angle Free-selected C cut From a rotation symmetrical basic form of the work part a circular sector is cut out. The size of the circular sector (opening angle of the wedge) as well as the location of its both limiting areas can be selected freely. Variants of the C cut are the full cut, half cut and free-selected cut. Free-selected Z cut With the help of the Z cut the work part can be cut at any point of the Z axis in the X, Y plane. The orientation of the Z cut indicates which of the so created two sides of the work part is currently shown. In the 3D view the different type of machining operations are indicated in color as follows: grey: geometries generated by rotation symmetrical machining operations blue: geometries generated by machining with driven tools red: threading generated by milling operations
MTS GmbH 1998
233
3D-View
3D view: 3D interface for the free-selectable location of the C cut
3D view: 3D interface menu for the freeselectable location of the Z cut
3D view: view of the work part as a 3D full view without section cut
234
CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle
12 CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle 12.1 Preface
F
Counter spindle Programming code Work part transfer
The counter spindle is an optional software supplement to the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6. This function has to be bought separately. The performance characteristics described below are available only if this supplementary software is available. The free-configurable counter spindle on a track of its own is in the first place created to take over the work part for complete machining especially for rear side machining. Either the counter spindle or the tailstock can be configured. For machining on counter spindle a complete programming code including the application of driven tools is available. The counter spindle makes it first of all possible to take over work parts from the main spindle or work parts which have already been machined. Furthermore, the counter spindle enables to take the work part from the main spindle and to transfer it to the counter spindle after trimming. The counter spindle consequently allows reversal or complete machining. The travel movement of the counter spindle is time controlled and is fully integrated in the mathematically exact collision monitoring within the machining space of the machine tool. If counter spindle is configured it is possible to select the clamping device and to insert the work part in counter spindle in set-up mode in work part and clamping device management. The work part can be inserted either separately one by one in the main or counter spindle or at once in both of them. For the take-over of the machining tools a special turret type vertically to the turning axis is automatically selected allowing tool application for machining on the main and counter spindle.
Collision monitoring Set-up mode
Machining with driven tools on the counter spindle
MTS GmbH 1998
235
CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle
Activating counter spindle
The functions and characteristics of the counter spindle are activated in the CNC machine configuration in which the counter spindle is configured instead of the tailstock. If you start the CNC simulator with such a configuration it is possible for you to use the counter spindle.
Programming key for counter spindle
The same machining possibilities (G and M commands, cycles) which are available on the main spindle of the CNC control are available on the counter spindle as well. Especially for the programming of the work part transfer, as well as for the differentiation of machining operations on the main and counter spindle new G and M commands were necessary to improve the functional applicability of these operations. In the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6 a CNC machine with a counter spindle has the machining possibilities G29, G30, G28: G29 Machining on the main spindle (standard) Machining takes place on the main spindle. The coordinate system, operation and programming of the CNC simulator remain unchanged. When starting the CNC simulator this machining status is activated as a standard. G30 Work part transfer This command initiates the work part transfer from the main spindle to the counter spindle. The counter spindle can be moved to a programmed position for the work part take-over. Prior to the subsequent machining the work part can be trimmed. During the work part transfer there are additional switch commands available for the main and counter spindle. Please note that for G30 the coordinate system of the last machining status is valid. This is usually G29. G28 Machining on the counter spindle Machining takes place on the counter spindle, i.e. the current coordinate system refers to the counter spindle as well as to switch and technology commands. In the following passages only the special travel and switch commands for the programming of a CNC machine with counter spindle are being discussed. For the programming of rotation-symmetrical machining as well as for the application of driven tools on counter spindle the same programming instructions are valid as for machining on the main spindle. These instructions (rotation-symmetrical machining) as well as in chapter 4 of this manual regarding the application of driven tools.
Machining states
236
Configuration
12.2 Configuration
Within the MTS configuration program of the CNC simulator there are extensive possibilities to adapt the software to the machine-specific conditions of the CNC control available. If a machine with counter spindle was selected as the machine type in the configuration of the machine to be used, then the counter spindle is additionally available. Here it is possible to set-up the counter spindle. Configuration of the machine: Set-up of the counter spindle
The following parameters of the counter spindle can be adjusted: geometrical dimensions of the shell surface diameter of the counter spindle spindle jut-out type of the chucks minimum clamping length on the counter spindle travel area of the counter spindle maximum infeed minimum and maximum number of rotations of the counter spindle changes of the coordinate system by mirroring the NC axes Y and Z availability of a C axis changing rotation direction for circular interpolation on the counter spindle, separately for turning and milling changing the rotation direction of the cutting radius compensation, separately for turning and milling relative rotation direction of the main and counter spindle in relation to each other
MTS GmbH 1998
237
G29
Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle
12.3 Programming the Counter Spindle 12.3.1 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle G29
Function The command G29 informs the CNC control that the subsequent machining operation is carried out on the main spindle. The control consequently activates the most recently used work part coordinate system for the main spindle. The zero point of the coordinate system is then set again to the value which was last valid on the main spindle.
NC command
G29
When starting the CNC simulator machining status G29 is in general active. This means that G29 needs to be explicitly programmed in the NC program only if a tool transfer (G30) or machining on the counter spindle (G28) was carried out. In G29 the following switch commands are valid for the main spindle: M03 Spindle rotation direction right (CW) M04 Spindle rotation direction left (CCW) M05 Spindle rotation off M07 Coolant 1 on M08 Coolant 2 on M09 Coolant off M10 Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle M11 Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle M15 Chucking jaws clamping inside for rotating spindle M16 Chucking jaws clamping outside for rotating spindle
Transfer command
238
Work Part Transfer
G30
12.3.2 Work Part Transfer G30

Function NC command The command G30 initiates the work part transfer from the main to the counter spindle.
G30
In machining state G30 it is possible to program the position movements of the counter spindle with G00 and G01 and the address V. In addition to this a number of supplementary M and G commands are available in the machining state G30. M03 M04 M05 M07 M08 M09 M10 Spindle rotation direction right (CW) Spindle rotation direction left (CCW) Spindle rotation off Coolant 1 on Coolant 2 on Coolant off Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle X... Diameter for the clearance of the chucking jaws Chucking jaws clamping inside for rotating spindle Chucking jaws clamping outside for rotating spindle C... Angular position of the main spindle at specified angle M28 Main spindle moment-free Spindle rotation direction right (CW) Spindle rotation direction left (CCW) Spindle rotation off Coolant 1 on Coolant 2 on Coolant off
Transfer commands for the main spindle in G30
M11 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle M15 M16
M19 [C...] Spindle halt at specified angle position
Switch commands for the counter spindle in G30
M53 M54 M55 M57 M58 M59
M60 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle X... Diameter for closing chucking jaws M61 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle M65 M66 X... Diameter for closing chucking jaws Chucking jaws clamping inside for rotating spindle Chucking jaws clamping outside for rotating spindle C... Angular position of the main spindle at specified angle M78 M95 M96 Switch commands for the main and counter spindle in G30
MTS GmbH 1998
M69 [C...] Spindle halt at specified angle position Counter spindle moment-free Switch on cleaning air blow of counter spindle Switch off cleaning air blow of counter spindle Switch on parallel run of main and counter spindle Switch off parallel run of main and counter spindle
M37 M38
239
G59
Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point (when Programming Travel Movements)
12.3.3 Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point (when Programming Travel Movements) G59
Function As a supplement to the counter spindle zero point a so-called counter spindle reference point is also identified. In standard setting these points are identical. With the command G59 it is possible to shift the counter spindle reference point incrementally. All coordinate data refer to this point when programming the travel movements of the counter spindle.
NC command Address
G59 V...
V... Value of the incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point The direction of the shift is defined by the sign of the address V: V+... V-... = = Shift in the direction of the positive Z axis Shift in the direction of the negative Z axis
Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point
= active work part zero point (in G29 and G30) = counter spindle reference point (example: identical with the counter spindle zero point) = value of the incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point = new counter spindle reference point (example: outer left side of the chucking jaws) Programming example Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point ... N045 G30 N050 G59 V-160 ...
Work part transfer (begin) incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point on the outside surface of the chucking jaws, i.e. 16 mm in direction of the negative Z axis
240
Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid Speed Movement
G00
12.3.4 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid Speed Movement G00
Function NC command Address The counter spindle can be positioned for the tool transfer with the command G00 and the address V.
G00 V...
V... Z coordinate of the target point of the counter spindle travel movement Please note that the Z coordinate of the travel movement refers to the reference point of the counter spindle. In the standard set-up this point is identical with the counter spindle zero point. However, it is possible to shift the counter spindle reference point incrementally with the command G59 to position it, for instance, on the outer edge of the clamping jaws. If the address V has been programmed in G30 instead of the address X the machine then moves the current tool to the indicated position.
Counter spindle movement in rapid speed (without shifting the counter spindle reference point)
= active work part zero point (in G29 and G30) = counter spindle reference point (without incremental shift with G59) = counter spindle movement in rapid speed Programming example Counter spindle movement in rapid speed without G59 Programming example Counter spindle movement in rapid speed with G59 ... N045 G30 N050 G59 V-160 ... N045 G30 N050 G00 V+130 ... Work part transition (begin) Counter spindle in rapid speed movement: The counter spindle reference point is moved to the value Z=+130 mm.
N055 G00 V-30 ...
Work part transition (begin) Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point on the outside surface of the chucking jaws, i.e. counter spindle in rapid speed: the counter spindle in rapid speed 160 mm to the negative Z axis. The counter spindle reference point is moved to the coordinate Z=30. This value corresponds to the clamping depth of the counter spindle.
MTS GmbH 1998
241
G01
Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F in mm/min
12.3.5 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F in mm/min G01
Function With the command G01 and the address V the counter spindle can be positioned for the tool transfer with the infeed F. Hereby the counter spindle can move up to a point of collision of the clamping device and the work part. This position can then be taken to clamp the tool and to continue machining.
G01 V... F...

V... Z coordinate of the target point of the counter spindle travel movement Please note that in G30 the coordinate system of the machining state is activated in which G30 has been called. The Z coordinate of the travel movement to be programmed under the address V refers to the counter spindle reference point. In standard setting this point is identical with the counter spindle zero point. The counter spindle reference point can, however, be incrementally shifted with the command G59, for instance to have the outer edge positioned on the chucking jaws.
F
Counter spindle in rapid speed movement (without shifting the counter spindle reference point)
F... In feed of the travel movement If the address V is programmed in machining state G30 instead of the address X the machine takes the current tool (instead of the counter spindle) to the indicated position.
= active work part zero point (in G29 and G30) = counter spindle reference point (without incremental shift with G59) = travel movement of the counter spindle in infeed Programming example Counter spindle travel movement in infeed F a) without G59 ... Work part transfer (begin) N045 G30 N050 G01 V+130 F1 Counter spindle movement in infeed F: The counter spindle reference point is moved to the value Z=+130 mm. ... b) with G59 ... N045 G30 N050 G59 V-160 N055 G01 V-30 F1 ...
Work part transfer (begin) Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point to the outer edge of the chucking jaws, i.e. travel in infeed F by 160 mm in direction of the negative Z axis. The counter spindle reference point is moved to coordinate Z=30. This value also corresponds to the clamping depth of the counter spindle
242
Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point
G27
12.3.6 Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point G27

The command G27 effects that the counter spindle zero point is moved to the configured counter spindle reference point in rapid speed. The counter spindle reference point is located at the extreme right edge of the travel area of the counter spindle in the machine room. NC command Counter spindle movement to the counter spindle reference point
G27
= current work part zero point (in machining states G29 and G30) = counter spindle reference point (without incremental shift with G59) = counter spindle movement to the counter spindle reference point
MTS GmbH 1998
243
G28
Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle
12.3.7 Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle G28

Function With the command G28 the CNC control is being informed that the subsequent machining takes place on the counter spindle. Hereby G28 activates the coordinate system for the counter spindle. The location of the zero point of this coordinate system can be defined when calling the command with optional addresses. Please, note that G27 (counter spindle movement to the reference point) should be programmed prior to programming G28.
NC Command
G28 [O...] [Z...]

If G28 is programmed without address the counter spindle zero point is automatically taken as the new zero point of the coordinate system.
Optional addresses
O50 Take-over of the counter spindle reference point as a new zero point of the coordinate system (standard) O51 Taking the present work part zero point of the work part on the main spindle as a new zero point of the coordinate system of the work part on the counter spindle O51 Z... Taking the present work part zero point as a new zero point of the coordinate system and a subsequent incremental shift of the new zero point by the value of Z with reference to the work part zero point
Mirroring Z axis
Mirroring the Z axis for machining on counter spindle is controlled by a configuration variable. Depending on the setting of these variables G28 either represents the mirroring of the Z axis or retains its direction. The location of the zero point depends on the fact if the mirroring of Z axis was made or not. Absolute and incremental zero point shifts programmed with G28 refer to the new zero point (= new work part zero point) specified in G28. In machining state G28 the following switch commands are valid for the counter spindle: M03 Spindle rotation direction right (CW) M04 Spindle rotation direction left (CCW) M05 Spindle rotation off M07 Coolant 1 on M08 Coolant 2 on M09 Coolant off M10 Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle M11 Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle M15 Chucking jaws clamping inside for rotating spindle M16 Chucking jaws clamping outside for rotating spindle
Zero point shifts Switch commands
244
Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle
G28
Zero and reference points on the main and counter spindle
= = = =
machine zero point work part zero point on the main spindle work part zero point on the counter spindle counter spindle zero point = counter spindle reference point
F
Programming example Work part transfer and machining on the counter spindle
Please, note the difference between the counter spindle zero point and the socalled counter spindle reference point. In standard setting these points are identical. The counter spindle reference point can, however, be shifted incrementally with the command G59. Consequently, it is reasonable for the programming of the work part transfer to shift for instance the counter spindle reference point on to the front edge of the chucks. Please, note that when programming the travel movements of the counter spindle the coordinate data refer to the reference point of the counter spindle. ... N045 G30 N050 G00 V+130.000 N055 M60 N060 M11 N065 G27 N070 G28 O51 Z-100 ...
Work part transfer (start) Counter spindle in rapid speed movement: The counter spindle reference point is placed on the value Z=+130 mm. Chucks of the counter spindle inwards (=close). Chucks of the main spindle outwards (=open). Reference path of the counter spindle. Switching on machining on the counter spindle: The work part zero point is taken as the new origin of the coordinate system in Z shifted by 100 mm to the left.
MTS GmbH 1998
245
G05
Bar feed
12.3.8 Bar feed for work parts in the main spindle G05
Function Conditions The bar moves to a programmed position or to the end stop mounted in the counter spindle. 1) 2) NC Block The bar is clamped with a collet chuck! The selected machining plane is the turning plane G14!
1) M70 2) G05 [W...] [F...]

W F incremental Z value for the shifting in the Z direction Feedrate in mm/min open the collet chuck the bar moves to the end stop mounted in the counter spindle open the collet chuck the bar moves 50 mm incremental in the positive X-direction with the feedrate of 300mm/min
Optional Addresses
Programming example ... M70 G05 ... ... M70 G05 W50 F200.000 ... open the collet chuck
the bar moves to the end stop mounted in the counter spindle
246
CNC Turning with Driven Tools
13 CNC Turning with Driven Tools 13.1 Preface
F
5 controllable NC axes: X, Z, Y, C and B
Driven tools is an optional software supplement to the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6. It can be separately purchased as a supplementary license. The functions described below are available only if this software supplement is installed in your system. The CNC simulator version 6 with driven tools represents a CNC machine tool with 5 controllable NC axes. Unlike the CNC simulator 5.x the traditional Cartesian coordinate system for turning with the main axes X and Z is extended by the main axis Y. This means that machining with driven tools can be programmed in a new Cartesian coordinate system offset the rotation center point (Y=0). In addition to the above there is a rotation axis C available. It enables you to control exactly the rotation of the work part in the Z axis. The rotation axis C can be both positioned exactly and interpolated. In this way it is possible to realize tool geometrys by overlapping a rotation in C with a simultaneous movement of the tool in X and/or Z. The swivel axis B of the turret is new as well. By programming B the turret is rotated in the turret reference point. It enables you to realize milling with driven tools on all surfaces and on all machining planes.
Location and direction of the NC axes X, Z, Y and C
Swivel axis B of the turret = Turret reference point = Turret rotation point = Tool reference point
MTS GmbH 1998
247

Machining planes The NC programming syntax of the CNC simulator turning 6 depends on the currently active machining plane. The following machining planes can be selected: Turning plane (G14) Standard plane (G15) Free-definable plane (G16) Front surface (G17) Shell surface (G18) Chord surface (G19) In addition to the turning plane (G14) the driven tools are available on all other machining planes (G15-G19) as well. Conventional rotation-symmetrical machining is programmed on the turning plane (G14). Overview of the machining planes of the CNC simulator turning 6 for machining with driven tools
Programming code
In addition to the commands G and M of the MTS syntax on turning plane (G14) the programming code for driven tools offers a set of new cycles for the application of driven tools.
248
Preface
As to the new cycles for driven tools machining and multiple cycles are differentiated. Machining cycles Multiple cycles The machining type and method as well as the geometry and additional information on the NC machining is programmed in the machining cycles. Using a multiple cycle a previously specified machining cycle is controlled to be performed either once or several times. In general, the following machining and multiple cycles are available on machining planes G16, G17, G18 and G19:
Available Machining Cycles G60 G61 G62 G63 G64 G65 G66
Face Milling Cycle Drilling Cycle Thread Tapping Reaming/Boring Square Pocket/in Groove Circular Pocket Tapping
Pages
in G16: 262 and in G19: 304
in G16: 264, in G17:278, in G18: 293 and in G19: 306 in G16: 265, in G17:279, in G18: 294 and in G19: 307 in G16: 266, in G17:280, in G18: 295 and in G19: 308 in G16: 267, in G17:281, in G18: 296 and in G19: 309 in G16: 268, in G17:282, in G18: 297 and in G19: 310 in G16: 270, in G17:283, in G18: 298 and in G19: 311
Available Multiple Cycle G67 G68 G69

Cycle on a Circle Cycle on a Radius Cycle at a Point
Pages
in G16: 270, in G17:284, in G18: 299 and in G19: 312 in G16: 271, in G17:285, in G18: 300 and in G19: 313 in G16: 272, in G17: 286, in G18: 301 and in G19: 314
General programming hints
Selecting Machining Plane on C Axis The functions and features of driven tools are activated in an NC program by selecting one of the machining planes of the C axis (G15-G19). In general, the main spindle is switched off (M05) when starting and the C axis is placed in the reference position (milling angle C=0). The further application possibilities of the C axis depend in the first place on the selected machining plane: When calling G16 (free-definable plane) and G19 (shell and mill surface) the C axis is positioned at a certain rotation angle. This value remains valid until some other plane is selected. This means that on the plane G16 and G19 it is not possible to re-position the C axis any more. The plane G15 (standard plane with linear interpolation), G17 (front face) and G18 (shell surface) are called without a specified rotation angle of the C axis. On these planes it is possible to position C at any rotation angle. Furthermore, it is possible to overlap the rotation movement of the C axis with the movement of the tool (interpolation of several NC axis). After one of the planes G15, G16, G17, G18 and G19 have been selected the machine commands (e.g. M03/M04/M05) as well as the following programmed technology data refer to the auxiliary drive of the driven milling tools on the turret.
MTS GmbH 1998
249

The technology parameters of the auxiliary drive can be programmed as follows: G97 S... G96 S... G94 F... G95 F... Rate of rotation of the tool Cutting speed of the tool Infeed in mm/min Infeed in mm/U
Programming Machining Cycles Programming machining with driven tools can be made in the NC program in different ways. In addition to the standard commands there are efficient machining and multiple cycles available. The machining cycle (G60-G66) is always programmed first in an NC program. This NC block generates no machining as such. Only if a multiple cycle (G67-G69) is programmed in one of the succeeding NC blocks the machining is carried out. This standard situation can be changed by programming the machining cycle and the multiple cycle in one NC block. The following facts are to be considered: The complete machining cycle with all necessary addresses has to be programmed first. The addresses of the machining cycle are followed by the G command of the desired multiple cycle as well as the necessary address for it. In such an NC block with machining and multiple cycles none of the addresses is allowed to appear more than once. The following information is of great importance regarding the NC programming of the CNC simulator turning 6: The programmable addresses of machining and multiple cycles depend on the currently active machining plane. Due to this reason the cycles of the driven tools are described below grouped according to the machining plane. Switching off Machining with Driven Tools By selecting the turning plane G14 the functions and features of the driven tools are de-activated again. The selection of G14 means that the auxiliary drive (M05) is switched off. The C axis remains with spindle halt (M05) at the position, which was taken after the last programmed movement on the C axis plane. The machine commands M03/M04/M05 as well as the technology data programmed after it refer again to the most recent active spindle (main or counter spindle).
250
Configuration
13.2 Configuration
The MTS configuration program of the CNC simulator contains extensive possibilities for adjusting the software to the special features of the machine tool and CNC control available. If a CNC machine with driven tools was selected in the configuration of the machine tool the additional configuration option driven tools is available. The corresponding set-ups can be made here. Configuration machine: Set-ups for the driven tools
The following parameters can be varied: the turret positions to be operated on driven tools can be specified the number of rotations in the different gear stages of the CNC machine can be defined it can be specified if the X coordinates programmed in the NC program should be interpreted as a diameter or radius in the different machining planes with driven tools. Definition of the interpretation of the X coordinate has a decisive influence on the programming of machining processes with driven tools. It is recommended to machine on all planes with radius programming. This set-up is used in the standard configurations for CNC turning machines with driven tools supplied by MTS. When configuring CNC machines with driven tools, also note the configuration menus main spindle, turret and eventually also counter spindle. In these menus the availability of the controllable NC axes C, Y and B needs to be set-up.
F F F
MTS GmbH 1998
In this manual all the programming clarifications on driven tools are based on the MTS standard machine configuration MTS GSP AWZ as well as on the MTS standard configuration MTS CNCT GSP AWZ for the CNC control for turning.
251
G14
Turning Plane
13.3 Turning Plane G14

Function The turning plane is selected with the command G14. In this plane it is possible to realize conventional, rotation-symmetrical tool geometries. When selecting the turning plane G14 no driven tools are available. As a zero point of the coordinate system the most recently used work part zero point is used. Its value depends on the activated machining status at the time when G14 is selected. G29 (machining on the main spindle) and G28 (machining on the counter spindle) are possible for the selection. For the selection of the turning plane G14 the turret has to be positioned in the rotation center (Y=0). If the CNC machine has a controllable Y axis a corresponding G command has to be programmed prior to calling G14. Programming takes place with the Cartesian coordinates X, Z, whereby X is to be entered as a diameter value. NC Command Programming hints
G14
If the turret was rotated in rotation axis B on some other machining plane prior to the selection of G14 this rotation remains valid on the rotation plane. Prior to making any further rotation-symmetrical machining the B axis in NC program should be first switched back to B=0 (for instance the command: G01 B0). This guarantees that the current tool correction values are processed correctly. A light swivel of the turret (small B values) changes the recessing and withdrawal angle of the tools. This can have positive and negative consequences for the programmed machining.
Location and direction of the NC axes X and Z on turning plane G14
Coordinate entries of a point on turning plane G14
252
Standard Plane
G15
13.4 Standard Plane G15

Function The standard plane is selected with the command G15. By selecting the plane G15 the control is instructed to carry out linear interpolation of the programmed coordinates in the axes X, Z, Y, C. The programmed tool movements refer hereby to the spatial Cartesian coordinate system X, Z, Y. The interpretation of the X coordinates as a radius or diameter value is configurable on the G15 machining plane. In general, it is recommended to work with radius programming on all planes. This set-up is also used in the standard configurations of the CNC turning machines supplied by MTS. In this manual all clarifications on programming with driven tools are based on a configuration with radius programming on all machining planes with driven tools. On the standard plane driven tools are available for machining. It is however not possible to program machining cycles. As a zero point of the coordinate system the most recently active work part zero point is used. Its value depends on the machining status activated when selecting G15. G29 (machining on the main spindle) or G28 (machining on the counter spindle) are possible as machining status. The turret can be moved in Y and additionally rotated in B axis. The rotation axis B can only be positioned here. Machining with the interpolation of the B axis is not possible. NC Command Location and direction of the NC axes X, Z, Y and C on standard plane with linear interpolation G15
G15
Entry of the coordinates of a point on standard plane with linear interpolation G15
MTS GmbH 1998
253
G16
Free-definable Plane
13.5 Free-definable Plane G16

Function Free-definable planes can be used to program milling operations with driven tools and a turret, that is rotated in B. In general the turret is tilted in such an angle B that the tool is located vertically to the plane to be machined. The rotation angle of the turret is within the range 90<B<+90 for a vertically clamped tool. For machining with a horizontally clamped tool it is reasonable to use the angle range 0<B<+180. Using the free-definable machining plane correspondingly requires the availability of the B axis on the CNC machine. Eccentric milling requires additionally the Y axis. For the realization of simple NC programming for milling with swiveled tools a new coordinate system is introduced by selecting machining on a free-definable plane G16. The coordinate axes YG16, ZG16 are hereby allocated to any plane. The third coordinate axis of the Cartesian coordinate system XG16 is located vertically on the specified plane directed off from the work part. Example of freedefinable plane G16 with the coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16
The definition of a new coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 is made by selecting any plane G16 in reference to the coordinate system X, Y, Z of the turning plane G14. The new coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 is specified by the rotation in the Y axis (rotation angle A) and by the shift of the new zero point in X and/or Z. The additional definition of the positioning angle of the rotation axis C defines the location of the free-definable plane G16. The value of this rotation angle A specifies simultaneously the angle B, which is the angle the tool turret has to be rotated for machining on the deliberate plane. Location of the coordinate system on free-definable plane G16
Original coordinate system of the turning plane G14 Shifted and rotated coordinate system of the free-definable plane G16
254
G16
Location variants of a free-definable plane G16 for manufacturing of shell and mill surfaces
F
Values of the coordinates of a free-definable plane G16
Please note in the above figure that the work part was first positioned on the corresponding point of the rotation axis C prior to starting the machining on the free-definable plane G16. Machining processes on the free-definable plane G16 are programmed in the Cartesian plane coordinates Y and Z of the new coordinates system X G16, YG16, ZG16. The infeed value within this plane is entered using the coordinate X.
MTS GmbH 1998
255
G16
Selection Alternative 1 of a free-definable plane NC command Addresses
G16 C... X... Z... V... W... I.../K...

C The rotation angle of the rotation axis on which the work part is positioned (identified) when selecting the plane. When switching on the CNC machine all controllable NC axis are being referenced. The reference point for the rotation angle 0 of the rotation axis C is located on the positive A axis of the machine coordinate system. By clamping the raw part the location of the value C=0 is defined in relation to the work part. After this it is possible to make the exact positioning of the work part for machining with driven tools by programming the address C. X, Z Coordinates of the starting point (P1) of one of the straight lines defining the plane (entry in the coordinate system of G14) V, W Coordinates of the end point (P2) of one of the straight lines defining the plane (entry in the coordinate system of G14) I/K One coordinate of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 (entry in the coordinate system of G14) The control calculates automatically the second coordinate for the definition of the location of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16. For this purpose the geometrical values of the straight lines defining the plane are used. The coordinates X, Z, V, W, I and K refer to the original coordinate system of the turning plane G14 when selecting the plane. When quitting the plane G16 the zero point is repositioned to the zero point of the turning plane G14.
F
Addresses of the selection alternative 1 of free-definable plane G16
Plane G16 (YG16, ZG16 plane) specified by the line P1-P2
256
G16
Selection Alternative 2 of a free-definable plane
G16 X... Z... A... I.../K... C...

C The rotation angle of the rotation axis on which the work part is positioned (identified) when selecting the plane
X, Z Coordinates of the starting point (P1) of one of the lines defining the plane This point is also the rotation point of the lines. A Rotation angle of the lines defining the plane in Y axis in relation to the direction of the positive Z axis of the G14 plane I/K One coordinate of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 (entry in the coordinate system of G14) The control calculates automatically the second coordinate for the definition of the position of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16. For this purpose the geometrical values of the lines defining the plane are used.
F
Addresses of the selection alternative 2 of free-definable plane G16
When selecting the plane the coordinates in X, Z, I and K refer to the original coordinate system of the turning plane G14. When quitting the plane G15 the zero point is re-positioned on the turning plane G14.
Free-definable plane G16 (YG16, ZG16 plane) specified by the point P1 and the angle A
MTS GmbH 1998
257
G16
Machining a boring pattern on a face surface programmed with free-definable plane G16
Programming example Selection of the free-definable plane G16 to machine a boring pattern on a plane surface G16
... N040 G94 F120 S1800 T0909 N045 G00 X+150 Z+30 N050 G16 X+60 Z-10 K-10 A-10 C+45 N055 G01 B-10 M03 N060 G01 X+30 Z-10 N065 G60 X-20 I+90 K+40 V+60 W-90 O011 N070 G69 N075 F80 S1200 T1515 M03 N080 G01 X+20 Z-50 N085 G61 X-50 K+20 A+10 B+10 D+10 W+30 N090 G67 Y+0 Z-55 J+0 E+360 R+20 S008 ...
258
Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16
G16
13.6 Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16

The geometrical programming entries for machining processes on a free-definable plane rotated in B axis are made based on the analysis of the 2D-CAD drawing of the work part to be machined. The process can be analyzed as follows: Initial Considerations 1. First find out which machining elements (curved surfaces, pockets, grooves, drillings) of the work part require for their machining the application of a turret rotated in B axis. Example for one machining task on plane G16 (part 1)
The above example shows a part of a drawing. The production task includes the machining of two curved surfaces and two drillings which are located at 180 angle to each other. These four machining elements require the application of a tool rotated in B axis. 2. Now group all the machining elements which can be machined with one rotation angle of the B axis and those which can be machined with one rotation angle of the C axis. Example for one machining task on plane G16 (part 2)
As a result of this second step you have two groups of elements to be machined: The curved surface as well as the drilling of the group 1 are to be machined in the position C=0 of the rotation axis. Both elements to be machined can be machined at the same angle position B of the turret. For machining the elements of the group 2 the rotation axis has to be positioned C=180. The same angle B can be used here as well. 3. The angle of the C axis as well as the location of the new coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 is defined by selecting the free-definable plane G16. During machining on this plane they cannot be changed any more. This means that in the current example, two different, free-definable planes G16 have to be selected one after the other to be able to realize all machining processes.
MTS GmbH 1998
259
G16
Defining Geometrical Entries for the Selection of the Free-Definable PlaneG16 After having clarified which elements can be manufactured together, the geometrical values required for the definition and selection of the free-definable plane G16 have to be specified. This is done in the following for the production elements of the group 1 of the above example. Example for a production task on plane G16 (part 3)
Production elements group 1 for whose production the free-definable plane G16 is to be selected Straight line 1 on the X, Z plane (Y=0) indicating the rotation of the freedefinable plane to be programmed in the Y axis of the coordinate system of the turning plane G14 (angle A) Straight line 2 on the X, Y plane (Z=0) indicating the rotation of the freedefinable plane to be programmed in Z axis of the coordinate system of the turning plane G14 (angle position of the rotation axis C) For the programming of machining with driven tools the turret has to be rotated in such an angle so as to have the milling tool vertically positioned to the selected free-definable plane G16. In this example the width of the angle A also specifies the width of the angle B.
For the exact definition of the angles A and C based on the CAD drawing it is necessary that the technical representation meets the following requirements: The longitudinal section of the work part in X, Z plane (Y=0) has to be represented from an angle with the work part rotated in Z axis prior to the representation. This means that the straight line 2 in the X and Y plane (Z=0) runs parallel to the Y axis. A side view or a section view (X, Y plane) of the work part has to indicate clearly the angle of the rotation axis C in which the machining is carried out.
260
G16
F
Geometrical data which is not sufficient for the selection of the plane G16 in a CAD drawing
If several free-definable planes G16 are to be programmed for one work part the following items have to be additionally considered: A side view or a section view (X, Y plane) has to indicate clearly the respective rotation angle of the rotation axis C. It describes the location of the various freedefinable planes to each other. For each element or each group of elements to be manufactured a longitudinal section in X, Z plane (Y=0) has to be drawn whereby the work part has to be rotated in the Z axis prior to it so as to have the straight line 2 in X, Z plane (Z=0) parallel to the Y axis. Otherwise, it is not possible to determine the angle A exactly from the drawing.
The above example shows a part of a drawing which in its present form does not contain enough information for the definition and selection of the free-definable plane G16 A group of elements to be manufactured for whose production the freedefinable plane G16 is to be selected. The straight line in X, Y plane (Z=0) does not run parallel to the Y axis. The drawing shows clearly the angle of the rotation axis C for both of the groups elements to be manufactured, however, it does not give any information on the rotation in longitudinal section in Y axis for the indicated group of elements to be manufactured. In such a case the value of the angle A has to be either explicitly indicated or represented in some other elevation.
MTS GmbH 1998
261
Free-definable Plane: G16
Face Milling Cycle
13.7 Machining Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 13.7.1 Face Milling Cycle G60
Function With the machining cycle G60 the machining of a face area is programmed. A face area is an area parallel to YG16ZG16 plane whose location in XG16 can be freely defined. The cycle machines the programmed face area with one infeed or in several infeeds. The travel paths of the milling tool can be optimized if necessary. In addition to G60 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). By programming the multiple cycle the machining cycle which was most recently specified is carried out.
NC command
G60 W... X... V... K... [I...] [O...] [O...]

When programming the addresses of the machining cycle all the coordinate data refer in the following to the coordinate system XG16YG16ZG16 of the plane G16. For this cycle it is necessary to have the Y axis available in the CNC machine. W Z coordinate of the end point of the face milling area The starting point of the face milling area is defined by the Z coordinate based on the multiple cycle programmed subsequent to it. If Z has not programmed in the multiple cycle the value of the current tool position is used when calling the cycle. X X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the face milling area Unlike for CNC milling the coordinate entry for the infeed is programmed as an absolute value in this cycle. V Half machining width in Y for machining the face milling area Machining face milling area takes place in Y direction starting from the Y coordinate with the value -V and moving towards the Y coordinate with the value +V. K Infeed in X direction (incremental) The infeed takes place incrementally starting from the X coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. The interpretation of the infeed value K as a radius or as a diameter depends on the current machine configuration. In the MTS standard configuration the radius programming is in general used for all machining planes with driven tools. If the absolute value is located between 2K and K the control makes the infeed twice. Half of the remaining infeed value is used as an infeed value for each run.
Addresses
Optional Addresses
Infeed in Z direction (infeed entry as a percentage of the milling tool diameter) The infeed in Z direction depends on the tool used for processing the cycle. If I has not been programmed then the control carries out the infeed with a value corresponding 75% of the width (diameter) of the current milling tool as a standard. Values which are larger than or identical with 100% are not acceptable for I. The sign of the address I specifies whether the machining is carried out synchron or as conventional milling: I+ = synchron machining (standard) I- = conventional machining
262
Face Milling Cycle
Free-definable Plane: G16 O Absolute or incremental entry of the Z coordinate of the end point W of the face milling area O70 Z coordinate of the end point W absolute (standard) O71 Z coordinate of the end point W incremental O Optimizing the travel paths when processing cycles O10 not optimized machining (standard) O11 optimized machining in Y direction If 011 is programmed the tool moves in Y from -Ymin to +Ymin, whereby Y min is the smallest value calculated for the current infeed to generate the programmed face milling area. In this case the programming of the address V has no relevance.
NC addresses for the programming of a face milling cycle G60 on freedefinable plane G16
Starting point of the plane area. The Z coordinate is defined in the multiple cycle or by the current tool position. End point of the face milling area (X, W)
MTS GmbH 1998
263
Drilling Cycle
13.7.2 Drilling Cycle G61

Function With the machining cycle G61 the machining of a drilling is programmed. Machining is carried out either as one or as multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted for chip breaking and chip cleaning. After each infeed the tool returns to the outer edge of the drilling hole. After a drilling hole has been completed the tool returns to the clearance plane. In addition to G61 a multiple cycle has to be programmed, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently defined machining cycle is carried out.
NC command
Addresses Optional addresses
G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

When programming the addresses of the machining cycle the coordinate values refer to the coordinate system XG16YG16ZG16 of the free-definable plane G16. X K X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth) Infeed in X direction (incremental) The infeed takes place incrementally starting from the X coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. The interpretation of the infeed K as either a radius or a diameter depends on the current machine configuration. The MTS standard configuration uses in general the radius programming for all machining planes with driven tools. D Decrease of infeed In the address D it is possible to program a decrease of the infeed K per machining run. This means that the value of the infeed K per machining run in reduced by the value D. The interpretation of the value reduction of D as either a radius or a diameter depends on the current machine configuration. The MTS standard configuration uses in general the radius programming for all machining planes with driven tools. The reduction of the infeed value K takes place at maximum up to the value equal to D (K=D). If no decrease value has been programmed then D=0 is valid. The tool drills in this case in each machining run up to the programmed depth X. A Dwell time for chip breaking (value as rotations of the tool) In the address A it is possible to program the dwell time for chip breaking. Having withdrawn to the clearance plane the tool carries out the programmed number of rotations and then breaks the chip. After that the next infeed is made. B Dwell time for chip cleaning (value as rotations of the tool) In the address B it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning. The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations at the bottom of the drilled shaft and then removes the chips. Subsequently, the tool is withdrawn to the clearance level and the next infeed starts. W The distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental, diameter value) In the address W it is possible to program the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid travel movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
264
Thread Tapping
13.7.3 Thread Tapping G62

Function With the machining cycle G62 it is possible to program a thread tapping cycle. The rotation direction of the thread tapping drill can be programmed for the infeed. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is then made with spindle rotations either to the right or to the left, with the stored number of rotations and infeed speed, and with the specified threading depth. After the cycle run the rotation direction is automatically changed and the tool returns to the clearance plane in specified infeed speed. If the withdrawal plane has been specified as well, then the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again and vice versa. In addition to G62 it is necessary to program the multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is carried out.
NC command Addresses Optional addresses
G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

X M W Threading depth (absolute) Rotation direction of the tool during infeed When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is automatically changed. Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid speed movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value. F Threading pitch
MTS GmbH 1998
265
Reaming/Boring
13.7.4 Reaming/Boring G63

Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling hole. Prior to calling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed to correspond to the applied reamer. When calling the cycle the infeed is made in the specified rotation direction either to the right or to the left, with the specified number of rotations and infeed speed up to the reaming depth as specified. After that the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in the specified infeed speed to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal plane has been specified as well the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction is changed again. In addition to G63, it is necessary to program the multiple cycle as well, for instance G68 (cycle on a radius). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is carried out.
G63 X... [W...]

X W Depth (absolute) Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control first feeds in the tool in rapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
266
Square Pocket/Groove
13.7.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64

Function With the command G64 it is possible to program a machining cycle for the machining of a square pocket or a groove. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the square pocket/groove is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts then the machining of the square pocket/groove with the stored technology values. The travel paths of the tool for cycle processing can be influenced by the sign when programming the infeed K. After processing the machining cycle G64 the tool is positioned at the cycle call point again. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.
G64 X... V... D... [K...] [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

X V W Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute) Dimension of the square pocket in Y Dimension of the square pocket in Z Infeed in X (incremental from cycle call onwards) K+ K-... On each infeed plane the square pocket is milled starting from the center of the square pocket. With a negative infeed value a groove is first milled to mark the outer line, then the rest the square pocket is milled in its full depth in one machining run.
Optional addresses
Infeed in the YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove in the cycle call point with reference to the negative ZG16 axis Positive values for A rotate the square pocket/groove counterclockwise. Negative rotation angle values induce a clockwise rotation.
Rounding radius of the corners of the square pocket The programmed value of B has to be larger than or equal to the radius of the applied milling tool.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental, diameter value) In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
MTS GmbH 1998
267
Circular Pocket
13.7.6 Circular Pocket G65

Function Using the command G65 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machining of a circular pocket. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocket is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. The tool travel paths for cycle processing can be influenced by the programmed sign of the infeed K. After the machining cycle has been processed G65 the tool is positioned at the cycle call point again. If the withdrawal plane was programmed as well the tool then returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.
G65 X... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Infeed in X K+... The tool moves in concentric circular paths when milling the pocket. K-... The tool moves in spiral paths when milling the pocket.
Optional Addresses
Infeed in YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between the withdrawal and the clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made in rapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
268
Tapping
13.7.7 Tapping G66

Function Using the command G66 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machining of a tapping. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the tapping with the programmed technology values. After processing the machining cycle G66 the tool returns to the cycle call point again. If the withdrawal plane was programmed as well, the tool returns to it in rapid speed.
G66 X... D... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X D B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Tapping radius Infeed in X Infeed in YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. A reasonable range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I. W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between the withdrawal and the clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made in rapid speed movement by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
Optional addresses
MTS GmbH 1998
269
Cycle on a Circle
13.8 Multiple Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 13.8.1 Cycle on a Circle G67
Function Using the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle can be repeated on a circle. Hereby the individual cycle runs are located equally far from each other on a circle. The coordinates of the circle center point can be programmed with the command G67. In other respects, the control uses the current tool position as a circle center point for the multiple cycle G67.
G67 R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y...]

R J H E S Radius of the circle Starting angle to the positive YG16 axis when the cycle is carried out for the first time Angle increment between the individual cycle runs End angle to the positive Y axis when the cycle is carried out for the last time Number of cycle runs on a circle Coordinates of the center of the circle For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the current tool position is used for the definition of the center of the circle . Beside R, three of the four addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.
Optional addresses
Z, Y
Programming hints
270
Cycle on a Radius
13.8.2 Cycle on a Radius G68

Function Using the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle can be repeated several times on a radius. Hereby the individual cycle runs are all located at the same distance from each other on a radius. The coordinates of the starting point of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. In other respects, the control uses the current tool position for the cycle call as a starting point of the radius for the multiple cycle G68.
G68 J... H... E... S... R... [Z...] [Y...]

J H E S R Angle of the radius to the positive YG16 axis Y components of the distance of the cycle runs on the radius The sign of H defines the direction of the radius in reference to the YG16 axis. Z components of the distance of the cycle runs on the radius The sign of E defines the direction of the radius in reference to the ZG16 axis. Number of cycle runs Distance between two cycle runs on the radius Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the first cycle call point For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the current tool position is used for the definition of the center of the circle.
Optional Addresses
Z, Y
Programming hints
Beside S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
271
Cycle at a Point
13.8.3 Cycle at a Point G69

Function Using the command G69 the CNC control is instructed to run the most recently programmed machining cycle only once at one point. The location of the point can be specified by programming its coordinates in the current coordinate system. If the command G69 is used to program a point, the control goes to this point with linear interpolation in all axes in rapid speed. After that the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
NC command Optional addresses
G69 [X...] [Z...] [Y...]

X, Z, Y Coordinates of the point on which the cycle is to be carried out For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used. If the processing of a machining cycle G60 is programmed with the command G69, then only the coordinates X and Y will be interpreted. The coordinate Y results from the face milling cycle G60. For the machining cycles G61, G62, G63, G64, G65 and G66 all the three coordinates X, Z and Y can be programmed.
Programming hints
272
Front Frace
G17
13.9 Front Face G17

The selection of this plane allows the machining of the X, Y plane of the X, Y, Z coordinate system. For the programming of this plane the Cartesian coordinates X, Y or the polar coordinates X, C can be used. On plane G17, tool movements which have been programmed in Cartesian coordinates X, Y are converted into movements of the X and C axis.
Location and direction of the NC axis X, Z, Y and C of front face milling G17
Programming front face machining in Cartesian coordinates
Programming front face machining in polar coordinates
Plane selection in NC program: NC command Programming hints
G17
When using the Cartesian coordinates X, Y the G commands G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72 and G73 can be applied as usual. The value of the coordinate X is then programmed as a diameter value. When programming in polar coordinates X, C the following has to be considered: the programming origin in polar coordinates is always located at X=0 and Y=0, i.e. exactly at the rotation center of the work part. The programmed coordinates are self-retaining. This means that if only one of the coordinates is given in an NC command the missing coordinate retains the value last programmed for it.
MTS GmbH 1998
273
Front Face: G10
Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates
13.9.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates G10

Function The command G10 makes the tool to go on a straight line to the programmed target point in rapid speed. The target point of the movement is programmed in polar coordinates.
G10 X... C...

X The diameter of the target point of the path movement The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of the coordinate X is interpreted as a radius or as a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all machining planes with driven tools. C Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of coordinates (absolute)
Programming hints
The NC command G10 is not self-retaining.
274
Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates
Front Face: G11
13.9.2 Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates G11

Function With the command G11 the tool goes to the programmed target point with infeed on a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed as polar coordinates.
G11 X... C...

X Diameter of the target point of the path movement The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of the coordinate X is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general the radius programming for all machining planes with driven tool. C Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of the coordinates (absolute)
Programming hints
MTS GmbH 1998
275
Front Face: G12
Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise
13.9.3 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise G12

Function With the command G12 the tool moves clockwise in infeed on an arc towards the programmed target point. The starting point of the travel movement is the current tool position. The target point of the travel movement and the center point of the circular arc are to be programmed.
G12 X... C... I... J... [O...]

X Diameter of the target point of the path movement (absolute) The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of the coordinate X is interpreted as a radius or as a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools. C I J Rotation angle of the target point in the coordinate origin (absolute) Diameter of the circle center (incremental from starting point) Rotation angle of the circle center in the coordinate origin (incremental from starting point) Interpretation of the addresses I, J and C O70 O71 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center (I, J) C coordinate of the target point incremental to the starting point
Optional addresses
F
Programming hints
Please note that the address O can be programmed twice within the NC command G12, and in each case with a different value. The NC command G12 is not self-retaining.
276
Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise
Front Face: G13
13.9.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13

Function With the command G13 the tools moves counterclockwise by infeed on a circular path to the programmed target point. The starting point of the travel movement is the current tool position. The target point of the travel movement and the center point of the circular path are to be programmed.
G13 X... C... I... J... [O...]

X Diameter of the target point of the path movement (absolute) The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of the coordinate X is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general the radius programming for all machining planes with driven tools. C I J Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of the coordinates (absolute) Diameter of the circle center (incremental from starting point) Rotation angle of the circle center in the origin of the coordinates (incremental from starting point) Interpretation of the addresses I, J and C O70 O71 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center (I, J) C coordinate of the target point incremental to the starting point
Optional addresses
F
Programming hints
Please note that the address O can be programmed twice within the NC command G12, and in each case with a different value.
MTS GmbH 1998
277
Front Face: G61
Drilling Cycle
13.10 Machining Cycles in the Front Face G17 13.10.1 Drilling Cycle G61
Function With the machining cycle G61 a drilling process is programmed. Machining is carried out as a single or multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted for chip breaking and chip cleaning. After each infeed the tool is withdrawn to the outer edge of the drilling hole. After completion of the drilling hole the tool returns to the withdrawal plane. In addition to G61 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is being carried out.
G61 Z... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

Z K Z coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth) Infeed in Z direction (incremental) The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the Z coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. D Degression of cutting depth In the address D it is possible to program the decrease of the infeed K per machining run. This means that the infeed K is reduced by the value D after each machining run. The infeed K can be reduced up to the value equal to D (K=D) at maximum. If no infeed value reduction has been programmed, then D=0. In this case the tool machines in one machining run up to the programmed depth Z. A Dwell time for chip breaking (as number of rotations of the tool) In the address A it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. The tool makes the programmed number of rotations after withdrawal to the clearance plane for chip breaking. After that the next infeed is made. B Dwell time for chip breaking (as number of rotations of the tool) In the address B it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations in the drilled hole to clean it. After this the tool is first withdrawn to the clearance plane to then perform the next infeed. W Distance of the clearance plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance Z between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The starting point of the cycle defines the Z coordinate of the withdrawal plane. If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made in rapid speed movement by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
278
Thread Cutting
Front Face: G62
13.10.2 Thread Cutting G62

Function With G62 it is possible to program a thread cutting cycle. The rotation direction of the tread tapping drill can be programmed for the infeed. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is then made with the programmed right or left rotation of the spindle, entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed threading depth. After that, the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again. In addition to G62 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming of the multiple cycle the most recently defined machining cycle is carried out.
G62 Z... [M...] [W...] [F...]

Z M W Threading depth (absolute) Rotation direction of the tool during infeed When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is automatically changed. Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid travel movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value. F Threading pitch
MTS GmbH 1998
279
Front Face: G63
Reaming/Boring

Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling hole. Prior to calling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed in accordance to the reamer applied. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is made with the programmed right or left rotation of the spindle, entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed depth. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed back to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the tool is changed again. In addition to G63 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed as well, for instance G68 (cycle on a radius). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is carried out.
NC command Address Optional addresses
G63 Z... [W...]

Z W Depth (absolute coordinates) Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid speed by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
280
Front Face: G64

Function With the command G64 a machining cycle for machining a square pocket/groove can be programmed. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the square pocket/groove is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point).The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the square pocket/groove with the programmed technology values. The travel paths of the tool can be influenced by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. After processing the machining cycle G64 the tool is repositioned to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.
G64 Z... V... D... K... [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

Z V D Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute) Dimension of the square pocket in X Dimension of the square pocket in Y Infeed in Z (incremental starting from the cycle call) K+ K-... On each infeed plane the square pocket is milled starting from the center point of the pocket. With a negative infeed value a groove marking the outline of the pocket is milled first and then the square pocket in its full depth in one machining run.
Optional addresses
Infeed in X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
A B
Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove in the cycle call point with reference to the positive X axis Rounding radius of the corners of the square pocket The programmed value of B has to be larger than or equal to the radius of the milling tool applied.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapid speed by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
MTS GmbH 1998
281
Front Face: G65
Circular Pocket

Function The machining of a circular pocket can be programmed with the command G65. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocket is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69. The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. For the processing of the cycle the travel path can be influenced by the sign of the infeed K when programming it. After processing the cycle G65 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal point has been programmed as well the tool then returns to the withdrawal point in rapid speed.
G65 Z... B... K... [I...] [W...]

Z B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Infeed in Z K+... The tool moves in concentric circles when milling circular pockets. K-... The tool moves in spiral circles when milling circular pockets.
Optional addresses
Infeed in the X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance Z between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The starting point of the cycle defines the Z coordinate of the withdrawal plane. If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made in rapid speed movement by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
282
Tapping
Front Face: G66
13.10.6 Tapping G66

Function The machining of a tapping can be programmed as a machining cycle with the command G66. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the tapping with the programmed technology values. Having processed the machining cycle G66 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G66 Z... D... B... W... K... [I...] [W...]

Z D B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Tapping radius Infeed in Z Infeed in the X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I. W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance Z between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The starting point of the cycle defines the Z coordinate of the withdrawal plane. If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made in rapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.
Optional addresses
MTS GmbH 1998
283
Front Face: G67
Cycle on a Circle
13.11 Multiple Cycles in the Front Face G17 13.11.1 Cycle on a Circle G67
Function With the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle can be run several times on a circle. Hereby the individual cycle runs all have the same distance from each other on this circle. The coordinates of the circle center point can be programmed with the command G67. Otherwise, the control uses the current tool position at the time of the cycle call as the circle center point for the multiple cycle G67.
G67 R... J... H... E... S... [X...] [Y.../C...]

R J H E S Radius of the circle Starting angle to the positive X axis when running the cycle on the circle for the first time Angle increment between the individual runs of the cycle End angle to the positive X axis applied for the final run of the cycle on the circle Number of the cycle runs on a circle Coordinates of the circle center point The circle center point can be programmed either in Cartesian (X, Y) or polar coordinates (X, C). When processing the cycle a Y coordinate programmed in Cartesian coordinates is converted into the corresponding rotation of the rotation axis C. For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used for the definition of the circle center point.
Optional addresses
X, Y/C
Programming hints
Beside R, three of the four addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.
284
Cycle on a Radius
Front Face: G68

Function The most recently programmed machining cycle can be run several times on a radius with the multiple cycle G68. The individual cycle runs are located at a constant distance from each other on the radius. The coordinates of the starting point of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. Otherwise, the control takes the current tool position at the time of the cycle call as the starting point of the radius for the multiple cycle G68.
G68 J... H... E... S... R...[X...] [Y.../C...]

J H E Angle between straight lines and the positive X axis X components of the pitch of the individual cycle calls on the radius Y components of the pitch of the individual cycle calls on the radius If the coordinate Y is used to program the starting point of the straight lines the value of the address E is also interpreted as the value of Y. If, on the other hand, C is used to program the starting point, then E indicates the rotation angle of the C axis. S R Number of cycle runs Distance between two cycle runs (pitch) on the radius Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and of the 1st cycle call point. The starting point can be programmed (X, Y) or in polar coordinates (X, C). either in Cartesian
Optional addresses
X,Y/C
When processing a cycle, a Y coordinate which has been programmed in Cartesian coordinates is converted into a corresponding rotation of the rotation axis in C. For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used for the definition of the starting point. Programming hints Beside S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
285
Front Face: G69
Cycle at a Point

Function The command G69 instructs the CNC control to run the most recently programmed machining cycle only once at one point. The location of this point can be specified by programming the coordinates in the current coordinate system. If a point has been programmed with the command G69, the control goes in all axes to this point with linear interpolation in rapid speed. Subsequently, the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
G69
X, Y/C
[X...] [Y.../C...]
Coordinates of the point at which the cycle is to be run For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the tool position is used.
286
Shell Surface
G18
13.12 Shell Surface - G18

By selecting this plane it is possible to machine on the plane Y, Z. The infeed is made in X. To program on this plane either the Cartesian coordinates Y, Z of the rolled out shell surface of the diameter X or the cylindrical coordinates Z, C can be used. On the plane G18 machining processes programmed in Cartesian coordinates Y, Z are being transformed into movements of the Z and C axis. The Y axis of the machine is not used here. During machining the tool is always positioned in the rotation center (Y=0).
F
Rolling out a shell surface
Cartesian coordinates of a point on a shell surface G18
Location of a point on a shell surface G18 in cylinder coordinates
MTS GmbH 1998
287
G18
Shell Surface
Selection alternative 1 for a shell surface in an NC program: NC command Address
G18 X...
X Cylinder diameter (reference diameter for rolling out the shell surface)
Selection alternative 2 for a shell surface in an NC program: NC command Address Programming hints
G18 B...
B Cylinder radius (reference radius for rolling out the shell surface)
When using the Cartesian coordinates Y, Z the G commands G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72 and G73 can be used as usual. Please, consider the following hints regarding the G commands when programming the cylinder coordinates Z, C.
288
Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates
Shell Surface: G10
13.12.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates G10

Function With the command G10 the tool moves in rapid speed to the programmed target point on a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed in polar coordinates.
G10 Z... C...

Z C Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path (absolute)
Programming hints
MTS GmbH 1998
289
Shell Surface: G11
Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates
13.12.2 Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates G11

Function With the command G11 the tool moves in infeed to the programmed target point on a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed in polar coordinates.
G11 Z... C...

Z C Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path
Programming hints
290
Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise
Shell Surface: G12
13.12.3 Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise G12

Function With the command G12 the tool moves clockwise in infeed to a programmed target point on a circular path. The starting point of the infeed is the current tool position. The target point of the travel path and the center point of the circular path are to be programmed.
G12 Z... C... K... J... [O...]

Z C K J Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path (absolute) Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path (absolute) Z coordinate of the circle center point (incremental from starting point) Rotation angle of the circle center point in the coordinate origin (incremental from starting point) O70 O71 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center point (K, J) C coordinate of the target point incremental with reference to the starting point
Optional addresses
O Control address for the interpretation of the addresses K, J and C
F
Programming hints
Please, note that the address O within the NC command G12 can be programmed twice, and in each case with different values. The NC command G12 is not self-retaining.
MTS GmbH 1998
291
Shell Surface: G13
Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise
13.12.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13

Function With the command G13 the tool moves counterclockwise as infeed to the programmed target point on a circular path. The starting point of the travel movement is the current tool position. The target point of the travel movement and the center point of the circular path need to be programmed.
G13 Z... C... K... J... [O...]

Z C K J Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path (absolute) Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path (absolute) Z coordinate of the target center point (incremental from starting point) Rotation angle of the circle center point in the coordinate origin (incremental from starting point) Control address for the interpolation of the addresses K, J and C O70 O71 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center point (K, J) C coordinate of the target point incremental to the starting point
Optional addresses
F
Programming hints
Please, note that the address O within the NC command G12 can be programmed twice, and in each case with different values. The NC command G13 is not self-retaining.
292
Drilling cycle
Shell Surface: G61
13.13 Machining Cycles in the Shell Surface G18 13.13.1 Drilling cycle G61
Function With the machining cycle G61 the machining of a drilling can be programmed. The machining takes place either as a single infeed or a multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted, if desired, for chip breaking and for chip cleaning. After each infeed the tool returns to the outer edge of the drilling hole. After completion of the drilling the tool returns to the withdrawal plane. In addition to G61 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is run.
G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W... ]

X K X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth) Infeed in X direction (incremental) The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the Y, X coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configuration specifies whether the infeed value K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools. D Degression of cutting depth In the address D it is possible to program the decrease per machining run of the infeed K. This means that K is reduced by the value D per each machining run. The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of the decrease D is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools. The decrease of the infeed K is carried out at maximum until its value is identical with the value D (K=D). If no decrease has been programmed, then D=0. The tool then drills up to the programmed depth X in one machining run. A Dwell time for chip breaking (entry as number of rotations of the tool) In the address A it is possible to program the dwell time for chip breaking. The tool makes the programmed number of rotations after the withdrawal to the clearance plane in order to break the chip. After this the next infeed is carried out. B Dwell time for chip cleaning (entry as number of rotations of the tool) In the address V it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning. The tool makes the programmed number of rotations at the drilling base in order to clean the drilling hole from chips. After that the tool is withdrawn to the clearance plane and the next infeed is carried out. W Distance between the clearance plane and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
MTS GmbH 1998
293
Shell Surface: G62
Thread Cutting

Function With the machining cycle G62 a thread cutting cycle can be programmed. The rotation direction of the thread cutting tool for the infeed can be programmed. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is made either with right or left rotation of the spindle, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed threading depth. At the end, the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane. If withdrawal plane has been programmed then the tool returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed. In addition to G62 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming of the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is run.
G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

X M W Threading depth (absolute) Rotation direction of the tool during infeed When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is automatically changed. Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed. F Threading pitch
294
Reaming/Boring
Shell Surface: G63

Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling. Prior to the call of G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed in accordance to the reamer applied. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is made either with right or left rotation of the tool, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed depth of the drilling. At the end, the rotation direction of the tool is automatically changed and the tool returns to the clearance plane in infeed speed. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again. In addition to G63 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed, for instance G68 (cycle on a radius). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is run.
G63 X... [W...]

X W Depth (absolute) Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
MTS GmbH 1998
295
Shell Surface: G64

Function With the command G64 the machining cycle is programmed for the machining of a square pocket/groove. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the square pocket/groove is programmed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool moves to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the square pocket/groove with the programmed technology values. The travel paths of the tool for the processing of the cycle can be influenced by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. Having processed the machining cycle G64 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.
G64 X... V... D... K... [I...] [A...] B...] [W...]

X V Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute) Dimension of the square pocket in Y If the corresponding multiple cycle uses the coordinates Z and C, then V is interpreted as a constant dimension specified. D K Dimension of the square pocket in Z Infeed in X (incremental starting from cycle call point) K+ On each infeed plane the square pocket is machined starting from the center of the pocket hole.
K-... If the infeed sign is negative the groove marking the final outline of the pocket is milled first and then in one machining run the square pocket in its full depth. Optional addresses I Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I. A B Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove in the cycle call point with reference to the positive Y axis Rounding radius of the corners of the square pocket The programmed value of B has to be larger than or identical with the radius of the applied milling tool. W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid travel movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
296
Circular Pocket
Shell Surface: G65

Function With the command G65 the machining cycle for machining a circular pocket is programmed. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocket is programmed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool moves in rapid speed to the cycle call point and starts the machining of the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. The travel paths for the processing of the cycle can be influence by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. After completing the processing of the machining cycle G65 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G65 X... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Infeed in X K+... The tool machines in concentric travel paths K-... The tool machines in spiral travel paths
Optional addresses
Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Distance between the clearance plane and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
MTS GmbH 1998
297
Shell Surface: G66
Tapping
13.13.6 Tapping G66

Function With the command G66 the machining cycle for tapping is programmed. The cycle call point (tapping center point ) is programmed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the tapping with the programmed technology values. After processing the machining cycle G66 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G66 X... D... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X D B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Tapping radius Infeed in X Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the diameter of the milling tool If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I. W Distance between the clearance plane and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
Optional addresses
298
Cycle on a Circle
Shell Surface: G67
13.14 Multiple Cycles in the Shell Surface G18 13.14.1 Cycle on a Circle G67
Function With the multiple cycle G67 it is possible to repeat several times the most recently programmed machining cycle on a circle. The pitch between the individual machining runs on the circle remains constant. The coordinates of the circle center point can be programmed with the command G67. If the coordinates of the circle center point have not been programmed, the control uses the current tool position for the cycle call as a circle center point for the multiple cycle G67.
G67
R J H E S
R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y.../C...]

Radius of the circle Starting angle to the positive X axis when running the cycle on the circle for the first time Angle element between cycle runs End angle to the positive Y axis when running the cycle on the circle for the last time Number of cycle runs on the circle Coordinates of the circle center point The circle center point can be programmed in the Cartesian coordinates (Z, Y) as well as in polar coordinates (Z, C) (Z, C). When processing the cycle a Y coordinate programmed as a Cartesian coordinate is converted into the rotation of the corresponding rotation axis. For the coordinates which have not been programmed the current tool position is used for the definition of the position of the circle center point.
Optional addresses
Z, Y/C
Programming hints
Beside R, three of the following addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
299
Shell Surface: G68
Cycle on a Radius

Function With the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle on a radius can be run several times. The machining pitch between the cycle runs on the radius remains constant. The coordinates of the origin of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. If the origin has not been programmed, the control takes the current tool position as the starting point of the radius for the multiple cycle G68 when calling the cycle.
G68 J... H... E... S... R... [Z...] [Y.../C...]

S J H Number of cycle runs Angle of the straight lines to the positive Y axis Distance of the cycle runs as a Y value or as rotation angle of the C axis If the coordinate Y is used for the programming of the starting point then the value of the address H is also interpreted as a Y value. On the other hand, if the coordinate C is used for the programming of the starting point then H indicates the rotation angle of the C axis. E Distance between the cycle runs in Z The sign of the value E defines the direction of the radius in relation to the Z axis. R Distance between two cycle runs on the radius Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the 1st cycle call point The starting point can be programmed in Cartesian coordinates (Z, Y) and also in polar coordinates (Z, C). When processing the cycle, the Y coordinate programmed in the Cartesian system is converted into the corresponding rotation of the rotation axis C. For the coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used for the definition of the starting point.
Optional addresses
Z, Y/C
Programming hints
Beside S, two of the following four addresses J, H, E or R need to be programmed.
300
Cycle at a Point
Shell Surface: G69

Function The command G69 makes the CNC control to run the most recently programmed machining cycle only once at a point. The location of the point can be specified by programming the coordinates in the current coordinate system. If a point is programmed with the command G69, then the control goes in rapid speed to this point with linear interpolation in all axes. Subsequently, the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
G69
Z, Y/C
[Z...] [Y.../C...]
Coordinate of the point to which the cycle is to be run For the coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used.
MTS GmbH 1998
301
G19
Chord Surface
13.15 Chord Surface G19

Chord surfaces are used to program milling with vertically applied driven tools. The milling tools are installed vertically when machining the selected chord surface in vertical direction to the Y, Z plane of the coordinate system of the turning plane G14. Therefore, a chord surface can be seen as a special case of the free-definable plane G16, whereby the rotation angle is A=0 and no new coordinate system is entered for this plane. Using chord surface does not necessarily require the availability of the B axis on the CNC machine. However, for eccentric machining an additional Y axis is required. The coordinate system of the turning plane G14 is valid also for machining on a chord surface G19. When programming the Cartesian plane coordinates Y and Z are used. The infeed is made in direction of the negative X axis. Location and direction of the NC axes X, Z, Y and C in the plane G19 chord surface
The coordinates of a point on the plane G19 chord surface
302
Chord Surface
Selecting chord surface in an NC program: NC command Address
G19
G19 C...
C Rotation angle of the rotation axis where the work part is positioned when selecting the plane (fixed)
When switching on the CNC machine the controllable NC axes are referenced. The reference point for the rotation angle 0 of the rotation axis C are located on the positive X axis of the machine coordinate system. When clamping the raw part the location of the value C=0 is specified in relation to the work part. Subsequently, it is possible to make the exact positioning of the work part for machining with driven tools by programming the address C.
MTS GmbH 1998
303
Chord Surface: G60
Plane Milling Cycle
13.16 Machining Cycles in the Chord Surface G19 13.16.1 Plane Milling Cycle G60
Function With the machining cycle G60 the plane milling is programmed. A plane is a surface parallel to the Y, Z plane whose location can be freely selected in X. The cycle machines the programmed plane surface either in a single or in multiple infeed. The travel paths of the milling tool can be optimized if desired. In addition to G60 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). By programming a multiple cycle the machining cycle most recently programmed is run.
NC command
G60 W... X... V... K... [I...] [O...] [O...]

When programming the addresses of the machining cycle the coordinate data refers in the following to the coordinate system X, Y, Z of the turning plane G14. The cycle requires the availability of a Y axis on a CNC machine. W Z coordinate of the end point of the plane surface The starting point of the plane surface is defined by the Z coordinate of the multiple cycle programmed after it. If Z is not programmed in the multiple cycle the value of the current tool position is used when calling a cycle. X X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the face surface Unlike a CNC milling machine the coordinate entry for the infeed is programmed with an absolute value in this cycle. V Half of the machining width in Y for the machining of the plane surface The machining of the plane surface in Y direction from the Y coordinate with the value -V, to the Y coordinate with the value +V. K Infeed in X direction (incremental) The infeed is made incrementally starting from the X coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configuration defines whether the infeed K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools. If the absolute value of the remaining infeed is between 2K and K, then the control makes the infeed twice. In each case half of the remaining infeed value is uses for the infeed.
Addresses
Optional addresses
Infeed in Z direction (infeed value as percentage of the milling tool diameter) The infeed in Z direction depends on the tool used for the cycle. If I has not been programmed the control automatically uses for infeed a value which is 75% of the width (diameter) of the current milling tool. Values which are larger than or equal to 100% cannot be applied for I. The sign of the address I defines whether synchron or conven-tional milling is used: I+ = synchron milling (standard) I- = conventional milling
304
Plane Milling Cycle
Chord Surface: G60 O Absolute or incremental Z coordinate of the end point W of the plane surface O70 Z coordinate of the end point W absolute (standard) O71 Z coordinate of the end point W incremental O Optimizing the travel paths when processing a cycle O10 machining without optimizing function (standard) O11 optimized machining in Y direction If O11 has been programmed the tool moves in Y only from -Ymin to +Ymin, whereby Y min is the smallest value calculated for the current infeed to generate the programmed plane surface. Programming the address V is in this case irrelevant.
MTS GmbH 1998
305
Chord Surface: G61
Drilling Cycle
13.16.2 Drilling Cycle G61

Function With the machining cycle G61 a drilling process is programmed. The machining is carried out as a single or multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted for chip breaking and chip cleaning if necessary. After each infeed the tool returns to the outer edge of the drilling hole. After completion of the drilling the tool returns to the withdrawal plane. In addition to G61 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming a multiple cycle the machining cycle most recently programmed is run.
G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

X K X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth) Infeed in X direction (incremental) The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the X coordinate of the starting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configuration specifies whether the infeed K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools . D Decrease of the infeed (diameter) In the address D it is possible to program the value the infeed is decreased per each machining run. This means that the infeed value K is reduced by the value D per each machining run. The current machine configuration specifies the interpretation of the reduction value D either as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driven tools. The infeed K is maximally reduced up to the value equal to D (K=D). If this decrease value has not been programmed then D=0 is valid. The tool then drills in one machining run up to the programming depth X. A Dwell time for chip breaking (given as number of rotations of the tool) In the address A it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations after withdrawal to the clearance plane in order to break the chip. After this the next infeed is made. B Dwell time for chip cleaning (given as number of rotations of the tool) In the address B it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning. The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations at the bottom of the drilling hole, in order to clean the drilling hole from the chips. After that the tool is withdrawn to the clearance plane and the next infeed is made. W Distance between clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
306
Thread Cutting
Chord Surface: G62

Function With the machining cycle G62 it is possible to program a thread cutting cycle. The rotation direction of the thread cutter for the infeed can be programmed. When calling the machining cycle the infeed is made either with a right or left rotation of the spindle, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed threading depth. Subsequently, the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, then the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again. In addition to G62 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming of the multiple cycle the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

X M W Threading depth (absolute) Rotation direction of the tool during infeed When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is changed automatically. Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental diameter value) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed. F Threading pitch
MTS GmbH 1998
307
Chord Surface: G63
Reaming/Boring

Function With the command G63 it is possible to program a machining cycle for reaming/boring. Prior to calling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed in accordance to the reamer applied. When calling the cycle the infeed is made with either a right or left rotation of the spindle, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed depth of the drilling. Subsequently, the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again. In addition to G63 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed as well, for instance G68 (cycle on a radius). With the programming of the multiple cycle the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
G63 X... [W...]

X W Depth (absolute) Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
308
Chord Surface: G64

Function With the command G64 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machining of a square pocket or a groove. The cycle call point (pocket center point) is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the square pocket/groove with the programmed technology data. The travel paths of the tool for processing the cycle can be influenced by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. After processing the machining cycle G64 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G64 X... V... D... [K...] [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

X V D Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute) Dimension of the square pocket in Y Dimension of the square pocket in Z Infeed in X (incremental starting from the cycle call point) K+ K-... On each infeed plane the square pocket is machined starting from the center. If the infeed value has a negative sign a groove marking the final outer line of the square pocket is milled first and after that the square pocket is machined in one machining run in its full depth.
Optional addresses
Infeed in the Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove with reference to the negative Z axis Positive values for A rotate the square pocket/groove counter-clockwise. Negative values for A rotate the square pocket/groove clockwise.
Rounding radius of the corners of the square pocket The programmed value of B has to be larger than or identical with radius of the milling tool applied.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental diameter value) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
MTS GmbH 1998
309
Chord Surface: G65
Circular Pocket

Function With the command G65 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machining of a circular pocket. The cycle call point (pocket center point) is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. The travel paths of the tool for the processing of the machining cycle can be influenced by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. After processing the machining cycle the tool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G65 X... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Infeed in X K+... The tool moves in concentric paths when machining K-... The tool moves in spiral paths when machining
Optional addresses
Infeed in the Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I.
Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
310
Tapping
Chord Surface: G66
13.16.7 Tapping G66

Function With the command G66 it is possible to program a machining cycle for machining a tapping. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the tapping with the programmed technology values. After processing the machining cycle G66 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed, the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.
G66 X... D... B... K... [I...] [W...]

X D B K Depth of the circular pocket (absolute) Radius of the circular pocket Tapping radius Infeed in X Infeed in the Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is 100%-I. W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining cycle (incremental) In the address W it is possible to program the distance between the withdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate of the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle. If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the tool is first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. After that machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.
Optional addresses
MTS GmbH 1998
311
Chord Surface: G67
Cycle on a Circle
13.17 Multiple Cycles in the Chord Face 13.17.1 Cycle on a Circle G67
Function With the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle can be run several times on a circle. The cycle machining pitch between the individual runs remains constant on the circle. The coordinates of the circle center point can be programmed with the command G67. In other case, the current tool position is taken as the circle center point for the multiple cycle G67 when calling the cycle.
G67 R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y...]

R J H E S Radius of the circle Starting angle to the positive X axis when running the cycle on the circle for the first time Angle increment between the cycle runs End angle to the positive Y axis when running the cycle on the circle for the last time Number of cycle runs on a circle Coordinates of the circle center point For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used. Beside R, three of the four addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.
Optional addresses
Z, Y
Programming hints
312
Cycle on a Radius
Chord Surface: G68

Function With the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle can be run several times on a radius. The cycle machining pitch between the individual runs remains constant on the radius. The coordinates of the starting point of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. Otherwise, the current tool position is taken as the starting point of the radius for the multiple cycle G68 when calling the cycle.
G68 S... J... H... E... R... [Z...] [Y...]

S J H E R Number of cycle runs Angle of the radius to the positive Y axis Distance of the cycle runs in Y The sign of H defines the direction of the radius with reference to the Y axis. Distance of the circle runs in Z The sign of E defines the direction of the radius with reference to the Z axis. Distance between two cycle runs Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the 1st cycle call point For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the current tool position is used.
Optional addresses
Z, Y
Programming hints
Besides S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.
MTS GmbH 1998
313
Chord Surface: G69
Cycle at a Point

Function With the command G69 the CNC control is instructed to run the most recently programmed machining cycle only once at a point. The location of the point is defined by programming its coordinates in the current coordinate system. If the point is programmed with the command G69, then the control goes in rapid speed to this point with linear interpolation in all axes. Subsequently, the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.
G69 [X...][Z...] [Y...]

X, Z, Y Coordinates of the point the cycle is to be run at For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding value of the current tool position is used.
314
Appendix: Table of Programmable Addresses
Appendix 1: Table of Programmable Addresses

All measurements are in millimeters (mm), unless otherwise stated.
Address
% A
Value / Range
000001 to999999 000 to 360 000.000 to 999.999
Explanation / Function
Identification of a Main Program Input of angles in degrees: G71 cycle Thread angle in degrees: Threading cycle G31 Dwell time (in seconds) after tool retreat for chipbreaking: Deep-drilling cycle G84 Length of the line in X (absolute); for calculation of the taper rise: Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89 Radius: Contour strings G72, G73 Rounding radius: Recessing cycle G86 Additional swivel rotation axis for the turret (depending on machine configuration and of the current machining plane) Exception: During contour programming of G72/G73 B remains circle radius.
000.000 to 999.999
C D
000.000 to 999.999 000.000 to 999.999
Positionable turning axis Depth of feed: Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89, G75 and G76 Degression: Deep drilling cycle G84 Finishing allowance: Clearance cutting cycles G78 and G85 Width of recess: Recessing cycle G79 Thread angle to the Z-axis, at the end point: Threading cycle G31 Taper rise : Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89 Angle of the oriented tangent to the positive Z-axis, at the end point: Contour strings G72/G73 Feedrate in mm/rev Lead: Threading cycles G31 and G33 Motion (G-) commands Distance after which the feed motion is interrupted for chip-breaking: Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89, G75 and G76 Radius of roundings at the upper edge of the recess: recessing cycle G79 Centre coordinate in X: commands G02 and G03, and contour strings G72 and G73 Difference of radii between the theoretical starting point and the end point of the thread: Threading cycle G31
- 999.999 to +999.999
000.000 to 360.000 - 360.000 to + 360.000
F G H
000.001 to 050.000 00 to 99 000.000 to 999.999
I - 999.999 to +999.999 -
MTS GmbH 1998
315
Address
I
Value / Range
- 999.999 to + 999.999
Infeed in X: Cross- and straight roughing cycles G75, G76, G81 and G89 as well as contouring contour parallel cross roughing cycle G83 Grinding allowance: Clearance cutting cycles G78 and G85 compliant with DIN 509 Type E and F Depth of clearance cut: Thread cutting cycles G78 and G85 compliant with DIN 76 Allowance in X: Recessing cycles G79 and G86 Rounding radius: Cycle G7 Chamfer length: Cycle G88 Feed adjustment per cut in X: Threading cycle G31 Clearing distance between tool and part: Recessing cycle G79 Centre coordinate in Z: Cycles G02 and G03 contour strings G72 and G73 Feed adjustment per cut in Z: Threading cycle G31 Feed adjustment per cut in Z: Straight and cross roughing cycles G75, G76, G82 and G89, Contouring cycle G83 Length of clearance cut: Threading cycles G78 and G85 compliant with DIN 76 Allowance in Z: Recessing cycle G79 Width of Recess: Recessing cycle G86 First drilling level: Deep drilling cycle G84 Optimization of remaining cuts: Roughing cycles G75, G76, G81, G82 and G89 DIN-Parameters : Clearance cutting cycle G78 compliant with DIN 509 Type E and F Length of line : Contour string G71 M functions Number of NC block Number of first block: Subprogram invocation G22 Nmber of first block: Routines G23 Block number : Jump instruction G24 Side angle to the side of the programmed end point: Recessing cycle G79 (tenths of degrees) Selection of alternatives: Contour strings Finishing allowance in Z: G57 command Selection of alternatives: Roundings with R+ in the course of contour strings Absolute coordinates of circle centres: Contour strings G72 and G73
000.000 to 999.999 J - 999.999 to + 999.999 000.000 to 999.999 K - 999.999 to +999.999 000.000 to 999.999 L 0 to 100 01 0r 02 000.000 to 999.999 M N O 00 to 99 001 to 999 000 to 999 000 to 450 O001, O002 O O011, O012 O070 -
316
Address
O
Value / Range
101, 102, 204, 206, 306, 410, 210, 316, 425, 540 00 to 99 000 to 999
Definition of dimensions: Clearance cutting cycle G78 compliant with DIN 509, Type E and F Addresses for parameter value assignation Number of last block: Subprogram invocation G22 Number of last block: Program part repetition G23 Final cut segmentation: Threading cycle G31 Side angle in tenth of degrees (to the side of the programmed corner point): Recessing cycle G79 Chamfer (R-) or rounding (R+): Contour strings G71, G72 and G73 Chamfer at the bottom edge: Recess. cycle G79 Degression of feeding depth: roughing cycles G75, G76, G81, G82 and G89 Number of cutting passes: Threading cycle G31 Number of cutting passes: Roughing cycles G75, G76 and G89 Number of repetitions: Subprogram invocation G22 and program part repetition G23 Spindle speed in RPM Constant spindle speed in m/min The first two digits (01 - 16) denote the turret position for tool change The last two digits (01 - 99) denote the compensation value storage Subprogram name: G22 Minimum depth of cut: Roughing cycles G75, G76, G81, G82 and G89 Distance by which the tool moves back for chipbreaking: Roughing cycles G75, G76, G81, G82 and G89 Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of recess: Recessing cycle G79 Coordinate value in X Coordinate value in X: G57 command Dwell in sec: G04 command Additional feed axis for the turret Coordinate value in Z Finishing allowance in Z: G57 command
P Q
000 to 450 R - 999.999 to +999.999 000.000 to 999.999
001 to 999
0001 to 9999
0101 to 1699
U V W
000000 to 999999 000.000 to 999.999 000.000 to 999.999
X - 999.999 to + 999.999 000.000 to 999.999 Y Z - 999.999 to + 999.999 - 999.999 to + 999.999 -
MTS GmbH 1998
317
Index
3D-View 233 Code (Number) See NC Block: 25 Commands 26 Modal and Non-modal 26 Compensation Values 230 Compensation Value Storage 21 Length Compensation 21 Configuration Counter Spindle 237 Driven Tools 251 Constant Cutting Speed See Cutting Speed: 66 Contour Segments See Contour Strings: 142 Contour String Three-Point String Arc - Arc 183 Contour Strings 142 Arc Segment 144 Chamfer between Two Lines 159 Circle Centres Absolute 147 Four-Point String with Tangential Transitions 188 Line Segment 144 Open Contour Strings 194 Pointed Tangential Transitions 150 Rounding between Two Entities 157 Selection of Solutions 151 Arc Criterion 154 Selection of Solutions - Angle Criterion 152 Selection of Solutions - Line Criterion 153 Selection of Solutions with Roundings 157 Tangential Connection to Preceding Entity 201 Tangential Transitions 148 Three-Point String Arc - Line 170 Line - Arc 176 Line - Line 166 Two-Point String Straight Line 160 Contouring Cycle Contouring/Multipass Cycle 111 Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour 98 Recessing Cycle for any Contour 124 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour 88 Coolant Activate/Deactivate 28 Coordinate System 13; 60 Cartesian Coordinate System 13 for CNC-Turning 13 Origin of the Coordinate System 13 Polar Coordinate System 13 Shift Coordinate System See Workpiece Zero: 59 Two-dimensional Coordinate System 13 Coordinates 13 Core Diameter of Threads See Thread: 69
Absolute Dimensioning 17 Absolute Dimensions Activate 61 De-Activate 62 Addresses Alternative Addresses 27 Combined Addresses 27 Optional Addresses 27 Table of Addresses 315 Alternative Solutions with Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142 Angle Criterion See Contour Strings: 152 Angle Criterion with Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142 Arc as a Contour Segment See Contour Strings: 142 Arc Criterion See Contour Strings: 154 Arc Criterion with Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142
Bar feed for work parts in the main spindle 246 Basic Geometry 13 Basics of NC Programming 25 Blank 219
Cancel Incremental Zero Shift 60 Centre Sleeve Lock/Unlock 29 Chamfer between Segments - See Contour Strings: 159 Chamfering between Axially Parallel Straight Lines Radius/Chamfer Cycle 131 Chamfering Cycle 131 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x Change of Address Letter 11 Change of G-Commands 11 Chord Surface 302 Chucking Depth 224 Circle Interpolation: 36 Circular Interpolation Clockwise 36 Clamping Devices 222 Clamping Mode 223 Clearance Cutting Cycle G78 in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F 81 G85 in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F 117 Clearance Cutting Cycle: 81; 117
318
Index
Counter Spindle 235 Configuration 237 G00 Rapid Speed Movement 241 G01 Travel Movement 242 G05 Bar feed 246 G28 Machining on the Counter Spindle 244 G29 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle 238 G30 Work Part Transfer 239 G59 Shift of the Reference Point 240 Machining states 236 Programming the Counter Spindle 238 Setup Data 225 Current Tool 226 Cutting Speed Constant Cutting Speed 66 Cycles 67 Table of Available Cycles 67
Incremental Dimensioning 17 Incremental Dimensions Activate 62 De-Activate 61 Incremental Zero Shift See Workpiece Zero: 59
Jump Instruction - unconditional 45
Deep Drilling Cycle See Drilling Cycle : 115 Define Workpiece Zero - Incremental 59 Define/Shift Zero See Workpiece Zero: 57 Description of a Final Contour 55 DIN 66025 31 Drilling Cycle Deep Drilling Cycle G84 115 Driven Tools 247 Chord Surface G19 302 Configuration 251 Free-definable Plane G16 254 Front Face G17 273 Machining Cycles 249 Machining planes 248 Multiple Cycles 249 Setup Data 227 Shell Surface G18 287 Standard Plane G15 253 Turning Plane G14 252 Dwell 38
Lead 50 Length Compensation See Compensation Values: 21 Limitation of the Travel Range See Travel Range Limitation: 113 Line as a Contour Segment See Contour Strings: 142 Line Criterion See Contour Strings: 153 Line Criterion with Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01 35
Machine Zero 15; 57 Machining Cycles 249 Machining planes 248 Machining states 236 Material 221 Measuring Unit Millimeters (mm), Switch to 41 M-Functions 28 Millimeters (mm), Switch to 41 Miscellaneous Functions 28 Modal Commands 26 Motion, Rapid 33 Multiple Cycles 249
End Block Number in Subprograms See Subprograms: 43 End Block Number of Repeated Program Parts See Repeated Program Parts: 44 External Diameter of Threads See Thread: 69
Feedrate 29 Millimeters per Minute 64 Millimeters per Revolution 65 Final Contour 55 Finishing Allowance 73 Four-Point String See Contour Strings: 142 Free-definable Plane 254 Front Face 273
MTS GmbH 1998
NC Block 25 Addresses 25 Code 25 Format 25 Skipping of NC blocks 207 Value 25 Word 25 NC Program Analysis 231 N-polygon 219
Open Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142 Optional Block Skip 43
Parameter 205 Planes
319
Chord Surface G19 302 Free-definable Plane G16 254 Front Face G17 273 Shell Surface G18 287 Standard Plane G15 253 Turning Plane G14 252 Pointed Tangential Transitions 150 Polar Coordinate System See Coordinate System: 13 Prefabricated Part 221 Program End 29 Programmed Halt 28 Programming the Spindle Speed 29 Programming with Parameter 205 Programming with Special Characters 207
Radiusing Cycle 131 Rapid Traverse 33 Recessing Cycle G79 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides: 87 G86 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses: 123 G87 Recessing Cycle for any Contour 124 Recessing Cycle G86 123 Reference Point 15 Move to the Reference Point 46 Reference Points 15 Relative Dimensioning 17 Repeated Program Parts 44 End Block Number 44 Start Block Number 44 Repetition of a Program Part See Repeated Program Parts: 44 Roughing Cycle Contouring/Multipass Cycle 111 Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour 79 Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour 98 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour 88 Straight Roughing Cycle- Rectangular Contour 77 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle- Conical Contour 135 Rounding Between Contour Entities - See Contour Strings: 157 Roundings between Axially Parallel Straight Lines Radius/Chamfer Cycle 131
Compensation Values 230 Counter Spindle 225 Current Tool 226 Driven Tools 227 Prefabricated Part 221 Syntax 217 Tailstock/Sleeve 224 Tools in the Turret 226 Workpiece Material 221 Shell Surface 287 Skipping of NC blocks 207 Special Characters 207 Spindle Activate/Deactivate 28 Spindle Speed 29 Spindle Speed Limitation 63 Standard Plane 253 Start Block Number in Subprograms See Subprograms: 43 Start Block Number of Repeated Program Parts See Repeated Program Parts: 44 Subprograms End 43 End Block Number 43 Invocation 43 Start Block Number 43 Subprograms: 43 Switching Functions 28
Screen Layout in CNC Simulator 6 10 Segment Contour Programming See Contour Strings: 142 Selection of Solutions See Contour Strings: 151 Selection of Solutions with Pointed Tangents 155 Setup Form Beginning/End Indicator 218 Blank 219 Chucking Depth 224 Clamping Devices 222 Clamping Mode 223
Table of available DIN commands 31 Tailstock 48 Tailstock/Sleeve 224 Tangential Transition with Contour Strings See Contour Strings: 142 Tangential Transitions 148 Tangents, Pointed 155 Thread 50; 69 Core Diameter 69 Cylinder Thread 50; 69 Depth 69 External Diameter 69 Lead 69 Taper Thread 50; 69 Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 76 85 Thread Undercut G85 in Compliance with DIN 76 121 Threading Cycle G31 69 Threading Cycle G33 50 Three-Point String See Contour Strings: 142 Tool Change 30 Tool Changing Position 15 Tool Compensation Storage See Compensation Values: 21 Tool Compensation Values See Compensation Values: 21 Tool Geometry 19 Tool Nose adjustable angle 19 Angle of Reversible Tip 19
320
Index
Clearance Angle 19 Infeed Angle 19 Lenght of Tool Nose 19 Theoretical Cutting Point 21 Tool Nose Compensation Value 21 Tool Nose Geometry 19 Tool Nose Radius 19; 21 Width of Tool Nose 19 Tool Nose Compensation 23; 52 Cancel 52 Left/Right of the Contour 52 Tool Nose Radius 23 Tool Nose Radius Compensation 23 Tool Reference Point 15; 21 Tool Shank Diameter 19 Minimum Diameter 19 Tool Shank: 19 Tool-Changing Position Move to the Tool-Changing Position 47 Tooling Quadrants 23 Tools Compensation Values 230
Current Tool 226 Setup Data Driven Tools 227 Tools in the Turret 226 Travel Range Limitation 113 Turning Plane 252 Turret Tools in the Turret 226 Two-Point String See Contour Strings: 142
Value See NC Block: 25
Words See NC Block: 25 Workpiece Material 221 Workpiece Zero 15; 57 Define - Absolute 57 Zero Shift 59
MTS GmbH 1998
321

Turning Programming Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turning Programming Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC-Simulator Turning

with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle

1 Basic Geometry ............................................................................................................13

2 Introduction into NC Programming.............................................................................25

3 Miscellaneous Functions (M-Functions) .................................................................... 28

4 Programming Commands in Compliance with DIN 66025 ........................................31

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

6 Segment Contour Programming ...............................................................................142

7 Parameters ..................................................................................................................205 8 Programming with Special Characters..................................................................... 207

13 CNC Turning with Driven Tools...............................................................................247

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

Appendix : Table of Programmable Addresses ..........................................................315 Index ...........................................................................................................................................................318

MTS GmbH 1998

MTS GmbH 1998

5 Controllable NC Axis: X, Z, C, Y, B Counter Spindle

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

0.2 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x

Summary of some G-commands

Some new G commands as syntax extension

MTS GmbH 1998

X= 20, Y= 30 X=-20, Y= 15 X= 40, Y=-25

Cartesian Coordinate System

Angles of holes on a divided circle Diagram 1.2

Determination of a point by the length L and the angle A Diagram 1.3

Two-dimensional coordinate system for NC programming for turning Diagram 1.4

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

1.1 Coordinate System

1.1 The Coordinate System

Coordinate System for CNC Turning

MTS GmbH 1998

The dimensioning is dependent on the location of the workpiece zero.

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

1.2 Reference Points

1.2 Reference Points

Tool Reference Point

MTS GmbH 1998

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

1.3 Absolute / Incremental Dimensioning

1.3 Absolute Dimensioning, Incremental Dimensioning (Relative Dimensioning)

MTS GmbH 1998

Cross turning and roughing tool Diagram 1.10

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

1.4 Tool Geometry

1.4 Tool Geometry

MTS GmbH 1998

1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage

1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage

Tool Nose Compensation Vector

MTS GmbH 1998

Theoretical tool nose (cutting point) Tool nose Centre

Offset Path Tool Nose Centre

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation (TNC)

1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation TNC

MTS GmbH 1998

2. Introduction into NC Programming

N Block Number G G- Command X Coordinates of the Target Position Z F S T M

Sequence of Words within an NC Block

Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

2.1 NC Block Format

2 Introduction into NC Programming

2.1 Structure of an NC Block (Format)

Words Address, Value Example